All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions
and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,
you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific
vehicle.
OWNER'S
MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
F2
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-
formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-
lished by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies in your country.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-
tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
✽
NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
F4
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-
fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai deal-
er. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man-
ual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
Copyright 2014 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet
Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page
8-5 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
1
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-3
Vehicle break-in process / 1-5
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-6
Introduction
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehi-
cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under vari-
ous road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents. Use the
index when looking for a specific area or
subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all
information in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manu-
al. These WARNINGs were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.You should
carefully read and follow ALL procedures
and recommendations provided in these
WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.
✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-
ful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
13
Introduction
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance, we
recommend you to use unleaded gaso-
line which complies with EN 228 and has
an octane rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock
Index) 91 or higher.
You may use unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of RON 91~94/AKI 87~90
but it may result in slight performance
reduction of the vehicle.
Except Europe
Your new HYUNDAI vehicle is designed
to use only unleaded fuel having an
Octane Rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) 87 or higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-
sions and spark plug fouling.
Leaded (if equipped)
For some countries, your vehicle is
designed to use leaded gasoline. When
you are going to use leaded gasoline,
ask an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
whether leaded gasoline in your vehicle
is available or not.
Octane rating of leaded gasoline is same
with unleaded one.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control sys-
tem’s oxygen sensor and affect
emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.)
Introduction
41
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content
2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and damage components of
the fuel system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasoline that meets Europe
Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents.
For customers who do not use good
quality gasoline including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or
the engine does not run smoothly, one
bottle of additives added to the fuel tank
at every 15,000km (for Europe)/5,000km
(except Europe). Additives are available
from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use
them.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding reg-
istration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-
able.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
15
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
• Do not tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Seat belt warning light
High beam indicator
Turn signal indicator
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light*
Parking brake & Brake fluid
warning light
Engine oil pressure warning
light
Electronic stability program
(ESP) indicator*
Electronic stability program
(ESP) OFF indicator*
Malfunction indicator light
Smart cruise control (SCC)
malfunction indicator*
Smart cruise control (SCC)
sensor malfunction indicator*
Cruise control indicator*
Cruise control SET indicator*
Immobilizer indicator
Low fuel level warning light
❈ For more detailed explanations, refer to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.
Charging system warning light
Tail light indicator
Front fog light indicator
Low windshield washer fluid
level warning light
Electric parking brake (EPB)
malfunction indicator*
AUTO HOLD indicator*
EPB
CRUISE
AUTO
HOLD
Engine coolant temperature
warning light
Door ajar warning light
Low tire pressure telltale*/
TPMS malfunction indicator*
P
Shift pattern indicatorAir bag warning light
Rear fog light indicator*
Overspeed warning light*
120
km/h
SET
* : if equipped
16
Introduction
Low beam indicator*
Trunk lid open warning light
2
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-3
Engine compartment / 2-4
Your vehicle at a glance
Your vehicle at a glance
22
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-17
2. Central door lock switch....................4-17
3. Power window switches ....................4-22
4. Power window lock button ................4-25
5. Outside rearview mirror control
switch................................................4-42
6. Outside rearview mirror folding
button*...............................................4-42
7. Driver’s seat adjustment ....................3-4
8. Driver’s position memory system* ....4-35
9. Hood release lever............................4-26
10. Trunk lid release lever .....................4-20
11. Fuel filler lid release button.............4-28
12. Fuse box .........................................7-54
13. Steering wheel tilt control* ..............4-37
14. Steering wheel ................................4-37
15. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ..............................................4-45
16. ESP OFF button*............................5-30
17. Headlight leveling device*...............4-81
* : if equipped
OHG010001L
23
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Instrument cluster ...............................4-44
2. Horn ....................................................4-39
3. Driver’s front air bag ...........................3-46
4. Light control/Turn signals....................4-78
5. Wiper/Washer .....................................4-83
6. Steering wheel audio control ............4-126
7. Cruise control switch or
Auto cruise control switch...........5-36/5-40
8. Ignition switch or
ENGINE START/STOP button........5-4/5-7
9. Audio system ....................................4-125
10. Hazard warning flasher switch..........4-76
11. Climate control system ...........4-91/4-101
12. Shift lever ..........................................5-12
13. Passenger’s front air bag..................3-46
14. Glove box........................................4-117
15. Electric parking brake (EPB)
switch*...............................................5-21
16. Auto hold control button* ..................5-26
17. Seat warmer* or
Seat warmer with air ventilation*..3-10/3-12
18. Brake pedal.......................................5-18
19. Accelerator pedal
* : if equipped
OHGC012002
Your vehicle at a glance
42
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-27
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-27
3. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-29
4. Radiator cap .....................................7-30
5. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-31
6. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-32
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-33
8. Air cleaner.........................................7-34
9.
Positive battery terminal
...................7-40
10. Negative battery terminal ..............7-40
11. Fuse box .........................................7-55
OHG010003L/OHG010004L
■■
2.4L
■
3.0L
3
Seats / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-18
Child restraint system / 3-29
Air bag - supplemental restraint system / 3-39
Safety features of your vehicle
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Driver’s seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(4) Lumbar support*
(5) Cushion extension*
(6) Driver position memory system*
(7) Active seat*
(8) Seat warmer*/
Seat warmer with air ventilation*
(9) Headrest
Front passenger’s seat
(10) Forward and backward
(11) Seatback angle*
(12) Seat warmer*/
Seat warmer with air ventilation*
(13) Headrest
Rear seat
(14) Armrest
(15) Headrest
(16) Seat warmer*
(17) Seat folding
*: if equipped
SEATS
OHG030001L
■ Automatic
■ Automatic
■ Automatic/Manual
■ Automatic
■ Manual
■ Manual
■ Type A
■ Type B
33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
while maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. We recom-
mend that your chest be at least
250 mm (10 inches) away from
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for passengers
Riding in a vehicle with the seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
seat is reclined during an accident,
the occupant’s hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the passen-
ger to keep the seatback in an
upright position whenever the vehi-
cle is in motion.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants
around the seat. If the seatback is
returned without being held and
controlled, the back of the seat
could spring forward resulting in
accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an acci-
dent or a sudden stop. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result
because the seat belt can't operate
normally.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
Front seat
Manual adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up
and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
OHG030003OHG030002
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or reverse without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you oper-
ate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
• If there are occupants in the rear
seats, be careful while adjusting
the front seat position.
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever
up several times.
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
1. Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support, or the rear portion of
the switch, to decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the
desired position.
Automatic adjustment
The front seat can be adjusted by using
the control switch located on the outside
of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust
the seat to the proper position so as to
easily control the steering wheel, pedals
and switches on the instrument panel.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unattended in the car.
OHG030004 OHG030005
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an elec-
tric motor. Stop the motor operation
once the adjustment is completed.
Excessive operation may damage
the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power seat
consumes a large amount of electri-
cal power. To prevent unnecessary
charging system drain, don’t adjust
the power seat longer than neces-
sary while the engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control switches at the same
time. Doing so may result in power
seat motor or electrical component
malfunction.
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Forward and backward
1. Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seatback angle
1. Push the upper part of the control
switch forward or backward to move
the seatback to the desired angle.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower the
front part of the seat cushion. Pull the
rear portion of the control switch up to
raise or down to lower the rear part of
the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
OHG030007 OHG030008 OHG030009
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
1. Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support or the rear portion of
the switch to decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the
desired position.
Active seat
(for driver's seat, if equipped)
• MODE 1 : Continuously activates both
top and bottom lumber support.
• MODE 2 : Continuously activates the
bottom lumber support.
• STOP: Stops the active seat function.
The active seat function is available
for vehicles equipped with lumbar
support type B.
Cushion extension
(for driver's seat, if equipped)
1. Push the switch forward to raise the
cushion extension. Push the switch
rearward to lower the cushion exten-
sion.
2. Release the switch once the cushion
extension reaches the desired posi-
tion.
OHG030013
OHG030010
OHG030011
■ Type A
■ Type B
OHG030012
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps to protect the head and neck
in the event of a collision.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
OMG038400
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest posi-
tion of the driver's seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
OHG030014
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Removal
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button (3)
while pulling the headrest up (4).
Reinstall
To reinstall the headrest:
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the holes
while pressing the release button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the recline
lever or switch (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate
height.
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
■ Type A
■ Type B
OHG034070
OHG034072
CAUTION
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the head restraint and
seat cushion raised, the head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
OYFH034205
■ Type A
■ Type B
OHG034071
OHG034073
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
3 different positions by pulling the head-
rest forward to the desired detent. To
adjust the headrest to it’s furthest back-
wards position, pull it fully forward to the
farthest position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
OHG030017
OHG030018
■ Type A
■ Type B
OHG030016
WARNING
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after reinstalling
and adjusting it properly.
311
Safety features of your vehicle
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
• Each time you press the button, the
temperature setting of the seat will
change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The occupants
must be able to feel if the seat is
becoming too warm and to turn the
seat warmer off. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time. In particular,
the driver must exercise extreme
care for the following types of pas-
sengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer.
OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )
→
■ Type A
■ Type B
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
Safety features of your vehicle
123
Air ventilation seat (if equipped)
The air ventilation is provided to cool the
front seats during hot weather by blowing
air through small vent holes on the sur-
face of the seats and seatbacks. While
the engine is running, push the rear por-
tion of the switch to cool the driver's seat
or the front passenger's seat.
When the operation of the air ventilation
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
• Each time you push the switch, the air-
flow changes as follows:
• When the air ventilation seat is turned
on, the seat may get cooler after about
5 minutes.
• The air ventilation seat defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an acci-
dent they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occu-
pants.
OHG030020
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
and gasoline. Doing so may dam-
age the air ventilation seat.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on the seat. Those things
may damage the air ventilation
seat.
• Be careful not to spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the seat. If
you spill some liquid, wipe the seat
with a dry towel. Before using the
air ventilation seat, dry the seat
completely.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the air ventilation
seat.
OHG030019
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear seat
Headrest
The rear seat is equipped with headrests
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps to protect
the head and neck in the event of a colli-
sion.
Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
OHG030021
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed. Severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
• When there is no occupant in the
rear seats, adjust the height of
the headrest to the lowest posi-
tion. The rear seat headrest can
reduce the visibility of the rear
area.
ONF039401
Safety features of your vehicle
143
Removal and installation (if equipped)
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes while press-
ing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
rear seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
• Each time you press the button, the
temperature setting of the seat will
change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer.
OHG030028
OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )
→
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to proper-
ly protect the occupants.
OHG030022
315
Safety features of your vehicle
Armrest
To use the armrest, swing down the arm-
rest to the lowest position (1).
Cup holder
To use the cup holder, pull up the cover (2).
OHG040167OHG030054
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time. In particular,
the driver must exercise extreme
care for the following types of pas-
sengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
Safety features of your vehicle
163
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Make sure the rear seat belt webbing
is in the guide to prevent the seat belt
from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest
position.
4. Pull on the seatback folding lever, then
fold the seat toward the front of the
vehicle.
OHG030061L
OHG030062L
OHG030063L
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry
longer objects than could not oth-
erwise be accommodated.
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the car is moving as this is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seats. This could allow cargo
to slide forward and cause injury or
damage during sudden stops.
317
Safety features of your vehicle
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward. Push back the
seatback firmly until it clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked in
place. When you return the seatback
to its upright position, always be sure it
has locked into position by pushing on
the top of the seatback.
6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position. Routing the
seat belt webbing through the rear
seat belt guides will help keep the
belts from being trapped behind or
under the seats.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and caus-
ing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Special care of objects should be
taken when placing them in the rear
seats, since those may hit the front
seat occupants in a frontal colli-
sion.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
and the parking brake is securely
applied whenever loading or
unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehicle
to move if the shift lever is inadver-
tently moved to another position.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly. If the seatback
is returned without holding it, the
back of the seat could spring for-
ward resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-
back is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seatback. Otherwise, in
an accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger com-
partment, which could result in
serious injury or death.
Safety features of your vehicle
183
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and younger
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat. Never
allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat. If a child over 12
must be seated in the front seat,
he/she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as
far back as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section
of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never wear a seat belt over frag-
ile objects. If there is a sudden
stop or impact, the seat belt can
damage it.
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt
webbing is straight and not twist-
ed.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged, replace it.
(Continued)
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and par-
ticularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild
soap and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in
a severe impact even if damage to
the assembly is not obvious. Belts
should not be worn with straps
twisted. Each belt assembly must
only be used by one occupant; it is
dangerous to put a belt around a
child being carried on the occu-
pant's lap.
319
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning
As a reminder to the driver and passen-
ger, the seatbelt warning light will blink
and warning chime will sound as follows:
Driver's side (1)
Warning light
• The seat belt warning light will blink for
approximately 6 seconds each time
you turn the ignition switch ON regard-
less of belt fastening.
• The seat belt warning light will blink for
approximately 6 seconds if the belt is
unfastened after the ignition switch is
ON.
• The seat belt warning light will blink for
approximately 6 seconds if the belt is
unfastened when the ignition switch is
ON.
• The seat belt warning light will blink if
the seat belt is unfastened when the
vehicle speed is over 9km/h(6mph).
The warning light will immediately stop
blinking if the vehicle speed is below
6km/h(3mph).
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly while driving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
OHG030029
Safety features of your vehicle
203
Warning chime (if equipped)
• The seat belt warning chime will sound
for approximately 6 seconds each time
you turn the ignition switch ON if the
seat belt is unfastened.
• The seat belt warning light chime will
sound if the seat belt is unfastened
when the vehicle speed is over
20km/h(12mph). The warning chime
will immediately stop if the vehicle
speed is below 20km/h(12mph).
Front passenger's side (2)
Warning light
The seat belt warning light will blink if the
seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle
speed is over 9km/h(6mph). The warning
light will immediately stop blinking if the
vehicle speed is below 6km/h(3mph).
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. After release, you
will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
B180A01NF-1
WARNING
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the front passen-
ger's seat belt warning system. It is
important for the driver to instruct
the passenger as to the proper
seating instructions as contained
in this manual.
321
Safety features of your vehicle
Height adjustment (front seat)
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-
imum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too near your neck. The
shoulder portion should be adjusted so
that it lies across your chest and midway
over your shoulder nearest the door and
not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while press-
ing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
B200A02NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt por-
tion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
OHG030030
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appro-
priate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to per-
sonal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
Safety features of your vehicle
223
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used.
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should auto-
matically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
B210A01NF-1
OED030300
OHG030031
323
Safety features of your vehicle
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive tension
on the driver or passenger's seat belt
when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
8KMB3311
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehi-
cle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this manu-
al.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts prop-
erly.
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your
seat.
Safety features of your vehicle
243
✽
NOTICE
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal oper-
ating conditions and are not haz-
ardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-
ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-
ed.
• Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pre-
tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument
panel will illuminate for approximate-
ly 6 seconds after the ignition switch
has been turned to the ON position,
and then it should turn off.
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds, or
if it illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-
tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag
system as soon as possible.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After acti-
vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be done
by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
(Continued)
325
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occu-
pant seat contained in this manual.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and chil-
dren. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehi-
cle. The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadver-
tent activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehi-
cle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat
belt must be discarded, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Body work on the front area of the
vehicle may damage the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt system. Therefore,
we recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
263
✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Safety Standards of your
country. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets Safety
Standards of your country. The restraint
must be appropriate for your child's
height and weight. Check the label on
the child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened snug on the hips and as low
as possible. Check if the belt fits periodi-
cally. A child's squirming could put the
belt out of position. Children are afforded
the most safety in the event of an acci-
dent when they are restrained by a prop-
er restraint system in the rear seat. If a
larger child (over age 12) must be seated
in the front seat, the child should be
securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position. Children
age 12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a
child age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
327
Safety features of your vehicle
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women to lessen the chance
of injury in an accident. When a seat belt
is used, the lap belt portion should be
placed as low and snugly as possible on
the hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should con-
sult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve max-
imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-
tem, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front seats should be in an
upright position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper protec-
tion if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. The protec-
tion of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work proper-
ly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will slide
under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's
neck could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the fetus is located or above
the abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
Safety features of your vehicle
283
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disas-
sembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected peri-
odically for wear or damage of any kind.
Any damaged parts should be replaced
as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. Additional questions concern-
ing seat belt operation should be directed
to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be care-
ful not to damage the seat belt web-
bing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle will not be as strong and
could possibly fail during a colli-
sion or sudden stop, resulting in
serious injury.
329
Safety features of your vehicle
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be prop-
erly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards of
your country.
Child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger-side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint sys-
tem can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside tempera-
ture does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the lug-
gage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in the case of a sudden
stop or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
Safety features of your vehicle
303
WARNING
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passen-
ger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the child restraint
system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use of
the child restraint.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over your-
self and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadver-
tently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the win-
dows, or lock themselves or oth-
ers inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and repo-
sition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always proper-
ly position and secure children in
the rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floor of a
moving vehicle. During a colli-
sion or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicle’s interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fasten-
ing them over a child.
• After an accident, have an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat belt,
tether anchor and lower anchor.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system
in the rear right seat.
331
Safety features of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the man-
ufacturer's instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats.
CRS09
OHG030032
■ Forward-facing child restraint system
■ Rearward-facing child restraint system
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, have
the system checked immediately
by your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint systems and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
increase the chance and/or
severity of injury in an accident.
Safety features of your vehicle
323
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. After installa-
tion of the child restraint system, try to
move it in all directions to be sure the
child restraint system is securely
installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull more
webbing toward the retractor. When you
unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to
retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passen-
ger emergency locking usage condition.
E2MS103005 OEN036101 OEN036104
333
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system
(if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the package tray.
Child seat restraint suitability for seat position using the seat belt
- For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your
children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
UF : Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this
mass group
X : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
Age group
Seating position
Front
Passenger
Rear left Rear Center
Rear right
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
XUX
U
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
XUXU
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
XUX
U
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
XUFX
UF
OHG030033
Safety features of your vehicle
343
1. Route the child restraint seat tether
strap over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rests, route the tether strap under the
headrest and between the headrest
posts, otherwise route the tether strap
over the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the seat.
OHG030034
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether anchor
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load caused
by multiple seats may cause the
tether anchor or lower anchorage
points to break, causing serious
injury or death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not prop-
erly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fit-
ting child seats that eliminates the need
to use the standard adult seat belt to
secure the seat in the vehicle. This
enables a much more secure and posi-
tive location with the added benefit of
easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it
has vehicle-specific approval in accor-
dance with the requirements of ECE-
R44.
There are ISOFIX symbols located on
the lower portion of each side of the rear
seatbacks. These symbols indicate the
position of the lower anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
Both rear outboard seats are equipped
with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as well
as a corresponding top tether anchorage
on the shelf behind the rear seats. The
ISOFIX anchorages are located between
seat cushion and backrest, marked with
the ISOFIX icon.
For installation, CRS ISOFIX connecters
have to engage with the vehicles ISOFIX
anchorages (listen for a CLICK, check
potential visual indicators on the CRS
and cross-check by pulling).
CRS with universal approval to ECE-R
44 need to be fixed additionally with a top
tether strap connected to the correspon-
ding top tether anchorage point on the
shelf behind the rear seats.
The installing and the use of a child-seat
has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to the
ISOFIX-seat.
OVI039060 OHG030035
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
Safety features of your vehicle
363
WARNING
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the center of the rear seat
using the vehicle's ISOFIX
anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are
only provided for the left and
right outboard rear seating posi-
tions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX
anchors by attempting to attach a
child restraint seat in the middle
of the rear seat to the ISOFIX
anchors.
In a crash, the child restraint seat
ISOFIX attachments may not be
strong enough to secure the child
restraint seat properly in the cen-
ter of the rear seat and may
break, causing serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat to
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX
anchor. Listen for the audible “click”
sound.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
child restraint hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat. (Refer to the previ-
ous page.)
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt web-
bing to get scratched or pinched by
the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX
anchor during installation.
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt web-
bing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the
lower anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the lower anchors.
337
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a child restraint
lower anchorage point. The
improper increased load may
cause the anchorage points or
tether anchor to break, causing
serious injury or death.
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-
patible child restraint seat only to
the appropriate locations shown
in the illustration.
• Always follow the installation and
use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child
restraint.
Safety features of your vehicle
383
F ISO/L1 - X X -
G ISO/L2 - X X -
E ISO/R1 - IUF IUF -
E ISO/R1 - IUF IUF -
D ISO/R2 - IUF IUF -
C ISO/R3 - IUF IUF -
D ISO/R2 - IUF IUF -
C ISO/R3 - IUF IUF -
B ISO/F2 - IUF IUF -
B1 ISO/F2X - IUF IUF -
A ISO/F3 - IUF IUF -
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
Front Passenger
FixtureSize ClassMass Group
Carrycot
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
Rear Center
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of
universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sys-
tem in this mass group and/or this size class.
* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the
foremost position of the passenger seat.
* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height
720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS
(height 650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface
Shape Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions- For Europe
339
Safety features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag*
(4) Curtain air bag*
(5) Driver’s knee air bag*
(6) Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch*
* : if equipped
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
WARNING
• Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the safety belts pro-
vided in order to minimize the
risk and severity of injury in the
event of a collision or rollover.
• SRS and pre-tensioners contain
explosive chemicals.
If scraping a vehicle without
removing SRS and pre-tension-
ers from a vehicle, it may cause
fire. Before scraping a vehicle, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Keep the SRS parts and wirings
away from water or any liquid. If
the SRS components are inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or
liquids, it may cause fire or
severe injury.
OHG030036/OHG030066L
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Safety features of your vehicle
403
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
a serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side air bag or curtain
air bag) in order to help protect the
occupants from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a col-
lision and its direction. These two fac-
tors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the densi-
ty and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. The determining factors are
not limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will sim-
ply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of the
extremely short time in which a collision
occurs and the need to inflate the air
bag between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant
impacts those structures. This speed of
inflation reduces the risk of serious or
life-threatening injuries in a severe col-
lision and is thus a necessary part of air
bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also caus-
es the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steer-
ing wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possi-
ble (at least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passengers
should always move their seats
as far back as possible and sit
back in their seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of collision, and passen-
gers may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
341
Safety features of your vehicle
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce dis-
comfort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though the smoke and powder are non-
toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult a doctor if the
symptom persists.
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger seat
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
If your vehicle is equipped with the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch,
you can activate or deactivate the front
passenger’s air bag when necessary.
For more details, please refer to 3-48
page.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage area’s
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
1JBH3051
OYDESA2042
OLM034310
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type C
Safety features of your vehicle
423
Air bag warning indicator
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
W7-147
CAUTION
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the
passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator will not illuminate (The pas-
senger's front air bag ON indicator
comes on and goes off after
approximately 60 seconds) and the
passenger’s front air bag will inflate
in a frontal impact even if the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the OFF position.
If this occurs, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch and the SRS air bag system
as soon as possible.
WARNING
• NEVER use a rearward facing
child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of
it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to
the CHILD can occur.
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it can
cause serious or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, be sure to install the
child restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain air
bags could cause serious injury
or death to an infant or child.
343
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com-
ponents:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules*
4. Curtain air bag modules*
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors*
10. Driver’s knee air bag module
11. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator* (front passenger's seat
only)
12. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch* (front passenger's seat only)
*: if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require air
bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light " " on
the instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position, after which
the SRS air bag warning light " "
should go out.
OHG030064L
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag
system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
The front air bag modules are located
both in the center of the steering wheel,
in the front passenger's panel above the
glove box and/or in the driver’s side knee
bolster. When the SRSCM detects a suf-
ficiently severe impact to the front of the
vehicle, it will automatically deploy the
front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other con-
trols.
OHM039103N
OHM039104N
Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
OHM039102N
Driver’s front air bag (1)
345
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not install or place any acces-
sories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a pas-
senger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liq-
uid air freshener inside the vehi-
cle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous pro-
jectile and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggra-
vate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If the SRS " " warning
light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on after illumi-
nating for about 6 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, or after the
engine is started, comes on while
driving, the SRS is not working
properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS “ ” warning
light to illuminate.
Safety features of your vehicle
463
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and the lap/shoulder belts at both the
driver and passenger seating positions.
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" or "AIR
BAG" embossed on the air bag pad cover
in the steering wheel and/or on the cover
of the driver's side knee bolster located
below the steering wheel and the pas-
senger's side front panel pad above the
glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity.
OHG030037
■ Driver’s front air bag
OHG030038
■ Driver’s knee air bag
OHG030039
■ Passenger’s front air bag
OHG030039L
• Type B
• Type A
347
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with con-
siderable force and in the blink of
an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-
pants in proper position to obtain
maximum benefit from the air bag.
Even with air bags, improperly belt-
ed and unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the air bag
inflates. Always follow the precau-
tions about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi-
mum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
• Front and side impact air bags
can injure occupants improperly
positioned in the front seats.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Move your seat as far back as pos-
sible from the front air bags, while
still maintaining control of the vehi-
cle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passengers
can be severely injured by inflating
air bags.
• Never lean against the door or cen-
ter console – always sit in an
upright position.
• Do not allow a passenger to ride in
the front seat when the passen-
ger’s front air bag OFF indicator (if
equipped) is illuminated, because
the air bag will not deploy in the
event of a moderate or severe
frontal crash.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument panel,
driver’s side knee bolster, and the
front passenger's panel above the
glove box, because any such
object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe enough
to cause the air bags to deploy.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
“ ”remains illuminated while
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag imme-
diately after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitu-
dinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
483
Passenger air bag “ON/OFF” switch
(if equipped)
The passenger’s front air bag can be
deactivated by the passenger’s front air
bag ON/OFF switch if a child restraint is
installed on the front passenger's seat or
if the front passenger's seat is unoccu-
pied by a person.
To ensure the safety of your child, the
passenger’s front air bag must be deacti-
vated when it should be necessary to
install a rearward facing child seat on the
front passenger seat in exceptional cir-
cumstances.
(Continued)
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occu-
pants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-
sarily close to the air bag while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occu-
pant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
(Continued)
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
• A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
(Continued)
OHG030065L
349
Safety features of your vehicle
To deactivate or reactivate the passen-
ger’s front air bag:
To deactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the master key into the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the OFF position. The pas-
senger’s front air bag OFF indicator ( )
will illuminate and stay on until the pas-
senger’s front air bag is reactivated.
To reactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the master key into the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the ON position. The pas-
senger’s front air bag OFF indicator will
go out.
✽
NOTICE
• When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position,
the passenger’s front air bag is activated
and child or infant seat should not be
installed on the front passenger seat.
• When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF posi-
tion, the passenger’s front air bag is
deactivated.
CAUTION
• If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is not working
properly, the air bag warning light
()
on the instrument panel will
illuminate.
And, the passenger's front air bag
OFF indicator
()
will not illumi-
nate, the SRS Control Module
reactivates the passenger’s front
air bag and the passenger’s front
air bag will inflate in frontal
impact crashes even if the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the OFF position.
If this occurs, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch, the pre-tensioner seat belt
system and the SRS air bag sys-
tem as soon as possible.
(Continued)
WARNING
On some models, the front air bag
ON/OFF switch could turn by using
a similar small rigid device. Always
check the status of the front air bag
ON/OFF switch and passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF indicator.
OHG030067L
Safety features of your vehicle
503
(Continued)
• If the SRS air bag warning light
blinks or does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, or if it illumi-
nates while the vehicle is being
driven, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch, pre-tensioner seat belt
and the SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
(Continued)
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch, do
not install a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passenger's seat.
A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
Children who are too large for
child restraint systems should
always occupy the rear seat and
use the available lap/shoulder
belts. Children are afforded the
most safety in the event of an
accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat.
• As soon as the child seat is no
longer needed on the front pas-
senger's seat, reactivate the front
passenger's air bag.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the
proper position of the passen-
ger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch.
• Deactivate the passenger's front
air bag only when the ignition
switch is switched off, or the mal-
function may occur in the SRS
Control Module.
And there may be a danger that
the driver's and/or front passen-
ger’s and/or side and curtain air
bag may fail to trigger, or not trig-
ger correctly during a collision.
• Never install a rearward facing
child seat on the front passen-
ger's seat unless the passenger's
front air bag has been deactivat-
ed. The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
(Continued)
351
Safety features of your vehicle
Side impact air bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front and/or out-
board rear seat. The purpose of the air
bag is to provide the vehicle's driver,
front passenger and/or outboard rear
passengers with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt alone.
• The side impact air bags are designed
to deploy only during certain side-
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and point
of impact.
• The side impact air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact
situations.
OHG030040
■ Front
OHG030041
OHG030042
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors,
put their arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window, or
place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
■ Rear
Safety features of your vehicle
523
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-
tain side impact collisions.
(Continued)
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side impact
air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
impact air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact
sensor when the ignition switch
is on.
• If the seat or seat cover is dam-
aged, have the vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer because your
vehicle is equipped with side
impact air bags.
OHG030043
OHG030044
WARNING
• The side impact air bag is sup-
plemental to the seat belt sys-
tems and is not a substitute for
them. Therefore your seat belts
must be worn at all times while
the vehicle is in motion. The air
bags deploy only in certain side
impact conditions severe enough
to cause significant injury to the
vehicle occupants.
• For best protection from the side
impact air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side impact air bag,
both front and all rear (if
equipped) seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened. The
driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00
and 3:00 positions. The passen-
ger’ arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
(Continued)
353
Safety features of your vehicle
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain
air bags are not designed to deploy in all
side impact situations, collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in most
rollover situations.
WARNING
• In order for side and curtain air
bags to provide the best protec-
tion, front seat occupants and
outboard rear occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belts properly fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system. Make sure to
position the child restraint sys-
tem as far away from the door
side as possible, and secure the
child restraint system in a locked
position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to follow the above instruc-
tions can result in injury or death to
the vehicle occupants in an acci-
dent.
Safety features of your vehicle
543
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expect-
ed to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
* : if equipped
(3) Side impact sensor (front)*
(4) Side impact sensor (rear)*
OHG030045/OHG030046/OHG030047/OHG030048/OHG030049
355
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensi-
ty, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
1JBA3513
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B and C pil-
lars where side collision sensors
are installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-gen-
uine parts may adversely affect
your vehicle’s collision and air
bag deployment performance.
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
563
Side impact and curtain air bags
(if equipped)
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side impact and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate only in
side impact collisions, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads,
the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully
on unimproved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
1JBA3515
1JBA3514
OHG030050
357
Safety features of your vehicle
• Frontal air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case, inflat-
ed air bags would not be able to pro-
vide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side impact and curtain air
bags may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional bene-
fit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
OBH0380601JBA3516OBH038058
Safety features of your vehicle
583
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly reduced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-
dents because air bag deployment
would not provide protection to the
occupants.
However, side impact and curtain air
bags may inflate when the vehicle is
rolled over by a side impact collision, if
the vehicle is equipped with side
impact air bags and curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not deliv-
ered to the sensors.
1JBA3517 1JBA3522 1JBA3518
359
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate
when you turn the ignition ON, or if it con-
tinuously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any
work on the steering wheel, the front
passenger's panel, front seats and roof
rails must be performed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of
the SRS system may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
•
No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument panel,
and the front passenger's panel
above the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe enough
to cause the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, they must
be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and pro-
cedures could increase the risk
of personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on the
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; have the car towed to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
603
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wear-
ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-
gency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between them-
selves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side air bag covers could interfere with
the proper operation of the air bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring har-
nesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
Adding equipment to or modifying
your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and your feet on
the floor.
361
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of poten-
tial risk of air bag system.
Note that these government warnings
focus on the risk of children, we also
want you to be aware of the risks which
adults are exposed to which have been
described in previous pages.
OHG030051L
4
Keys / 4-3
Smart key / 4-7
Remote keyless entry / 4-10
Theft-alarm system / 4-13
Door locks / 4-16
Trunk / 4-20
Windows / 4-22
Hood / 4-26
Fuel filler lid / 4-28
Panorama sunroof / 4-31
Driver position memory system / 4-35
Steering wheel / 4-37
Mirrors / 4-40
Instrument cluster / 4-44
Rear parking assist system / 4-68
Parking assist system / 4-72
Rearview camera / 4-76
Hazard warning flasher / 4-76
Lighting / 4-77
Wipers and washers / 4-83
Interior light / 4-86
Welcome system / 4-89
Defroster / 4-90
Features of your vehicle
Manual climate control system / 4-91
Automatic climate control system / 4-101
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-113
Storage compartment / 4-117
Interior features / 4-118
Audio system / 4-125
Features of your vehicle
4
43
Features of your vehicle
Record your key number
The key code number is
stamped on the key
code tag attached to the
key set. Should you lose
your keys, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Remove the key code
tag and store it in a safe place. Also,
record the key code number and keep it
in a safe and handy place, but not in the
vehicle.
Key operations
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• Used to lock and unlock the glove box.
Type A
To unfold the key, press the release but-
ton then the key will unfold automatically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
KEYS
WARNING
- Ignition key (Smart key)
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key (smart
key) is dangerous even if the key is
not in the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the ACC or ON position. Children
copy adults and they could place
the key in the ignition switch or
press the ENGINE START/STOP
button. The ignition key (smart key)
would enable children to operate
power windows or other controls,
or even make the vehicle move,
which could result in serious bodi-
ly injury or even death. Never leave
the keys in your vehicle with unsu-
pervised children, when the Engine
is running.
WARNING
Use only HYUNDAI original parts
for the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return to
ON after START. If this happens, the
starter will continue to operate
causing damage to the starter
motor and possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
OHG040001L
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without press-
ing the release button. This may
damage the key.
Features of your vehicle
44
Restrictions in handling keys
When leaving keys with parking lot and
valet attendants, the following proce-
dures will ensure that your vehicle’s trunk
and glove box compartment can not be
opened in your absence.
To activate the trunk lock system so that
the trunk can only be opened with the
main key, perform the following:
1. Unlock the glove box by using the
main key then open it.
2. Set the trunk lid control button to the
OFF position (unpressed).
3. Close and lock the glove box using the
main key.
When leaving your keys with a parking lot
or valet attendant, perform steps 1 to 3
above, and leave the sub key with the
attendant. In this manner the sub key can
only be used to start the engine and
operate door locks.
Lock release
To release the trunk lock feature, open
the glove box with the main key and set
the trunk lid control button to the ON
position (pressed).
Type B
To remove the mechanical key, press and
hold the release button (1) and remove
the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a click
sound is heard.
OHG040003 OHG040004L
45
Features of your vehicle
Restrictions in handling keys
When leaving keys with parking lot and
valet attendants, the following proce-
dures will ensure that your vehicle’s trunk
and glove box compartment can not be
opened in your absence.
To activate the trunk lock system so that
the trunk can only be opened with the
mechanical key, perform the following:
1.
Press and hold the release button and
remove the mechanical key.
2. Unlock the glove box by using the
mechanical key then open it.
3. Set the trunk lid control button to OFF
position (unpressed).
4. Close and lock the glove box using the
mechanical key.
When leaving your keys with a parking lot
attendant or valet, perform steps 1 to 4
above, remove the mechanical key from
the smart key and leave the smart key
with the attendant. In this manner the
smart key can only be used to start the
engine and operate door locks.
Lock release
To release the trunk lock feature, open
the glove box with the mechanical key
and set the trunk lid control button to ON
position (pressed). In this position the
trunk will open with the trunk lid button or
smart key.
Immobilizer system (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system to
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle
use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the ignition key
and electronic devices inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies if the ignition
key is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
OHG040005
Features of your vehicle
64
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobilizer system activates auto-
matically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-
der and turn it to the ON position.
✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobilizer keys around.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each
key separate in order to avoid a starting
malfunction.
✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave
this number anywhere in your vehi-
cle.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is designed
to give years of trouble-free service,
however you should avoid expo-
sure to moisture, static electricity
and rough handling. Immobilizer
system malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
The engine may not start because
the metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from trans-
mitting normally.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it
could cause the immobilizer sys-
tem to malfunction and should only
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the immobilizer system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
47
Features of your vehicle
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
The functions of buttons on a smart key
are similar to the remote keyless entry.
(Refer to the “Remote keyless entry” in
this section.)
Smart key functions
Carrying the smart key, you may lock and
unlock the vehicle doors (and trunk).
Also, you may start the engine. Refer to
the following, for more details.
Locking
Using the door handle switch
Pressing the button of the front outside
door handles with all doors closed and
any door unlock, locks all the doors. If all
doors, trunk and engine hood are closed,
the hazard warning lights will blink once
to indicate that all doors are locked.
Also, the outside rearview mirror will
automatically fold if the outside rearview
mirror folding switch is in the AUTO posi-
tion (if equipped).
However, if any door, trunk or engine
hood remains open, the hazard warning
lights will not operate. If all doors, trunk
and engine hood are closed after the lock
button is pressed, the hazard warning
lights will blink once.
The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.)
from the outside door handle. If you want
to make sure that a door has locked or
not, you should check the door lock but-
ton inside the vehicle or pull the outside
door handle.
Even though you press the outside door
handle buttons, the doors will not lock
and the chime will sound for 3 seconds if
any of following occur:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is in ACC or ON
position.
• Any door except the trunk is open.
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
OHG040010L
OHG040007L
OHG040011
Features of your vehicle
84
Using the button on the smart key
All doors are locked if the lock button(1)
is pressed. If all doors, trunk and hood
are closed, the hazard warning lights will
blink once to indicate that all doors are
locked. Also, the outside rearview mirror
will automatically fold if the outside
rearview mirror folding switch is in the
AUTO position (if equipped).
However, if any door, trunk or engine
hood remains open, the hazard warning
lights will not operate. If all doors, trunk
and engine hood are closed after the lock
button is pressed, the hazard warning
lights will blink once.
Unlocking
Using the door handle switch
Press the button of the front outside door
handles with all doors closed and locked,
unlocks all the doors. The hazard warn-
ing lights will blink twice to indicate that
all doors are unlocked. Also, the outside
rearview mirror will automatically unfold if
the outside rearview mirror folding switch
is in the AUTO position (if equipped). The
button will only operate when the smart
key is within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the
outside door handle.
When the smart key is recognized in the
area of 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the front
outside door handle, other people can
also open the door without possession of
the smart key.
After pressing the button, the doors will
lock automatically unless you open any
door within 30 seconds.
Using the button on the smart key
All doors are unlocked if the unlock but-
ton(2) is pressed. The hazard warning
lights will blink twice to indicate that all
doors are unlocked. Also, the outside
rearview mirror will automatically unfold if
the outside rearview mirror folding switch
is in the AUTO position (if equipped).
After pressing this button, the doors will
lock automatically unless you open any
door within 30 seconds.
49
Features of your vehicle
Trunk open
Using the trunk handle switch
If you are within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from
the outside trunk handle with your smart
key in your possession, the trunk will
unlock and open when you press the
trunk handle switch.
Also, once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automatically.
Using the button on the smart key
The trunk is opened if the trunk unlock
button(3) is pressed for more than 1 sec-
ond.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automatically.
The word “HOLD” is written on the button
to inform you that you must press and
hold the button for more than 1 second.
Start-up
You can start the engine without inserting
the key. For detailed information refer to
“Engine start/stop button” in section 5.
Smart key precautions
✽
NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to lose
your smart key, you will not be able to
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if
necessary, and contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, you should immedi-
ately take the vehicle and key to your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer to pro-
tect it from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any of
following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- You keep the smart key near a
mobile two-way radio system or a
cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the smart key could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or send-
ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing the
smart key and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from elec-
tromagnetic materials that blocks
electromagnetic waves to the key
surface.
Features of your vehicle
104
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for sever-
al years, but if the smart key is not work-
ing properly, try replacing the battery with
a new one. If you are unsure how to use
your smart key or replace the battery,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
The circuit inside the smart key can have
a problem if exposed to moisture or stat-
ic electricity. If you are unsure how to
use your smart key or replace the bat-
tery, contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart
key.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
✽
NOTICE
• Using the wrong battery can cause the
smart key to malfunction. Be sure to
use the correct battery.
• Circuits inside the smart key may
develop problems when dropped,
exposed to moisture or static electrici-
ty.
• If you suspect that your smart key
might have sustained some damage,
or you feel your smart key is not
working correctly, contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button is
pressed while all doors are closed.
The hazard warning lights blink once to
indicate that all doors are locked. Also,
the outside rearview mirror will automati-
cally fold if the outside rearview mirror
folding switch is in the AUTO position (if
equipped).
However, if any door, engine hood or
trunk remains open, the hazard warning
lights will not operate. If all doors, engine
hood and trunk are closed after the lock
button is pressed, the hazard warning
lights will blink once.
OHG040009
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
(IF EQUIPPED)
OHG040006L
411
Features of your vehicle
Unlock (2)
All doors are unlocked if the unlock but-
ton is pressed.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that all doors are unlocked.
Also, the outside rearview mirror will
automatically unfold if the outside
rearview mirror folding switch is in the
AUTO position (if equipped).
After pressing this button, the doors will
lock automatically unless you open any
door within 30 seconds.
Trunk open (3)
The trunk is opened if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed with all doors locked, the trunk will
lock automatically.
The word "HOLD" is written on the button
in inform you that you must press and
hold the button for more than 1 second.
Transmitter precautions
✽
NOTICE
• The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
- The ignition key is in ignition switch.
- You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the transmitter is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or send-
ing/receiving emails.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Avoid placing the transmitter and
your cell phone or smart phone in the
same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance between
the two devices.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
124
Battery replacement
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat-
tery which will normally last for several
years. When replacement is necessary,
use the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the transmitter center
cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
For transmitter replacement, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for transmit-
ter reprogramming.
CAUTION
• The keyless entry system trans-
mitter is designed to give you
years of trouble-free use, howev-
er it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use your
transmitter or replace the battery,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to malfunc-
tion. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or
expose it to heat or sunlight.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
OVF041213
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
413
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm sys-
tem will have a label attached to the vehi-
cle with the following words:
1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM
This system is designed to provide pro-
tection from unauthorized entry into the
car. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-
gered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Armed stage
Using the smart key
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Make sure that all doors, the engine
hood and trunk lid are closed and
latched.
3.• Lock the doors by pressing the button
of the front outside door handle with
the smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights operate
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door remains open, the doors
won't lock and the chime will sound for
3 seconds. Close the door and try
again to lock the doors.
If trunk lid or engine hood remains
open, the hazard warning lights won't
operate and theft-alarm will not arm.
After this, trunk lid and engine hood
are closed, the hazard warning lights
blink once.
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
OJC040170
Features of your vehicle
144
• Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the smart key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will operate
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, trunk lid or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning
lights won't operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. After this, if all doors,
trunk lid and engine hood are closed,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once.
Using the transmitter
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine and remove the
ignition key from the ignition switch.
2.Make sure that all doors, the engine
hood and trunk lid are closed and
latched.
3.Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the transmitter.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, trunk lid or engine hood
remains opened, the hazard warning
lights won't operate and theft-alarm will
not arm. After this, if all doors, trunk lid
and engine hood are closed, the haz-
ard warning lights will blink once.
• Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passen-
ger(s) remains in the vehicle, the
alarm may be activated when the
remaining passenger(s) leave the
vehicle. If any door, trunk lid or
engine hood is opened within 30
seconds after entering the armed
stage, the system is disarmed to
prevent unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A door is opened without using the
transmitter (or smart key).
• The trunk is opened without using the
transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
approximately 30 seconds. To turn off the
system, unlock the doors with the trans-
mitter (or smart key).
415
Features of your vehicle
Opening the trunk with the alarm
armed (if equipped)
When the alarm is armed, the alarm will
not sound if the trunk lid is opened with
the transmitter (or the smart key).
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will be locked automati-
cally and the system will be armed again.
Also, if any of the doors or hood is
opened while the trunk lid is opened and
the alarm armed, the alarm will sound.
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when the
doors are unlocked with the transmitter
(or smart key).
After depressing the unlock button, the
hazard warning lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
After depressing the unlock button, if any
door (or trunk) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
✽
NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starter motor is disabled during the
theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch, turn the ignition
switch to the ON position and wait for
30 seconds. Then the system will be
disarmed. (except China)
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction and should only be
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
Features of your vehicle
164
Operating door locks from out-
side the vehicle
Mechanical key
To remove the cover:
1. Pull out the door handle (1).
2. Press the lever (A) located inside the
bottom part of the cover with a key or
flat-head screwdriver (2).
3. Push out the cover while pressing the
lever.
• After removing the cover, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock
and toward the front of the vehicle to
lock (3).
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door with
a key, only the driver’s door will
lock/unlock.
• Once the door is unlocked, it may be
opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
Transmitter/Smart key
• Doors can be locked and unlocked with
the transmitter (or smart key).
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
pressing the button of the outside door
handle with the smart key in your pos-
session.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door locks
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
DOOR LOCKS
OHG400012
L
L
o
o
c
c
k
k
U
U
n
n
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
WARNING
Be careful not to damage the cover
while removing it or misplace it
after removing it.
WARNING
• If you don’t close the door secure-
ly, the door may open again.
• Be careful that someone’s body
and hands are not trapped when
closing the door.
417
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on the door lock button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock but-
ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s
or front passenger’s door is pulled
when the door lock button is in the lock
position, the button unlocked and the
door opens.
• The front door cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch and
the door is opened.
• A door cannot be locked if the smart
key is in the vehicle and any door is
opened.
With central door lock switch
Operate by pressing the central door lock
switch.
OHG040013
L
L
o
o
c
c
k
k
U
U
n
n
l
l
o
o
c
c
k
k
WARNING - Door lock mal-
function
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehi-
cle, try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
OHG040014
OHG040015
■ Driver’s door
■ Front passenger’s door
Features of your vehicle
184
• When pushing down on the front por-
tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear por-
tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch and
front door is opened, the doors will not
lock even though the front portion (1)
of central door lock switch is pressed.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle and
any door is opened, the doors will not
lock even though the front portion(1) of
central door lock switch is pressed.
Door lock/unlock features
Impact sensing door unlock system
All doors will automatically unlock when
an impact causes the air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically lock after the
vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h (9.3
mph).
Engine off door unlock system
(if equipped)
Without smart key system
All doors will automatically unlock when
the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
With smart key system
All doors will automatically unlock when
the ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the OFF position.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehi-
cle is in motion to prevent acci-
dental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
419
Features of your vehicle
Shift lever door lock/unlock system
(if equipped)
• All doors will automatically lock when
the shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the shift lever is moved into P
(Park).
Driver's door unlock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically unlock when
the driver's door is unlocked.
✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the auto
door lock/unlock features in the vehicle.
Refer to "Vehicle Option" in this chap-
ter.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
hole (1) and turn it to the lock ( )
position. When the child safety lock is
in the lock position, the rear door will
not open even though the inner door
handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle (2).
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle until the rear door child
safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To pre-
vent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used when-
ever children are in the vehicle.
OHG042017
Features of your vehicle
204
Opening the trunk
• Press the trunk unlock button for more
than 1 second on the transmitter (or
smart key).
• Press the button on the trunk handle
with the smart key in your possession.
• Insert the master key (or mechanical
key of the smart key) into the lock and
turn it clockwise.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk locks automatically.
• To open the trunk from inside the vehi-
cle, pull the trunk lid release lever.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk locks automatically.
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock and
trunk mechanisms may not work prop-
erly due to freezing conditions.
TRUNK
OHG040018L
OHG042016
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
trunk before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
trunk lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the trunk is not closed
prior to driving.
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when open-
ing the trunk.
421
Features of your vehicle
Closing the trunk
To close, lower the trunk lid, then press
down on it until it locks. To be sure the
trunk lid is securely fastened, always
check by trying to pull it up again.
✽
NOTICE
If the trunk is closed with the smart key
in it, the chime will sound for approxi-
mately 3 seconds and the trunk will
reopen.
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an emer-
gency trunk release cable located inside
the trunk. If someone is inadvertently
locked in the trunk, moving the handle in
the direction of the arrow will release the
trunk latch mechanism and open the
trunk.
WARNING
The trunk lid should be always kept
completely closed while the vehicle
is in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases may
enter the car and serious illness or
death may result.
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
trunk safety release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the
trunk if you are accidentally
locked in the trunk.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk at any time. The
trunk is a very dangerous loca-
tion in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emer-
gencies only. Use extreme cau-
tion, especially while the vehicle
is in motion.
OHG040019
Features of your vehicle
224
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up/down
(7) Power window lock switch
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power windows
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
WINDOWS
OHG040020
423
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door's window. The driv-
er has a power window lock switch which
can block the operation of passenger
windows. The power windows can be
operated for approximately 30 seconds
after the ignition key is removed or turned
to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if
the front doors are opened, the power
windows cannot be operated within the
30 second period.
✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open position),
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This
noise is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the fol-
lowing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you expe-
rience the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the win-
dows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corre-
sponding switch to the first detent posi-
tion (5).
Auto up/down window
Pressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or press and release
the switch to the opposite direction of the
movement.
If the power window is not operated cor-
rectly, the automatic power window sys-
tem must be reset as follows:
OHG040021 OHG040022
Features of your vehicle
244
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Close the window and continue pulling
up on the driver’s power window switch
for at least 1 second after the window
is completely closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approxi-
mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for the
window is only active when the “auto
up” feature is used by fully pulling up
the switch. The automatic reverse fea-
ture will not operate if the window is
raised using the halfway position on the
power window switch.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resist-
ance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
OUN026013
425
Features of your vehicle
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power window
switches on the rear passengers' doors
by pressing the power window lock
switch to the lock position (pressed).
When the power window lock switch is
pressed:
• The driver's master control can oper-
ate all the power windows.
• The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's power
window.
• The rear passenger's control cannot
operate the rear passenger's power
window.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren, when the Engine is running.
• NEVER leave any child unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entan-
gle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a win-
dow.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(pressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend face or arms out-
side through the window opening
while driving.
OHG040023
Features of your vehicle
264
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, pull the secondary latch
(1) inside of the hood center and lift
the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will raise completely
by itself after it has been raised about
halfway.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-
lowing:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
HOOD
OHG040024 OHG040025
WARNING
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shift the
shift lever to the P(Park) position
and set the parking brake.
427
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood raised. The view will be
blocked and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
Features of your vehicle
284
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel
filler lid opener button.
✽
NOTICE
If the fuel filler lid will not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or
push on the lid to break the ice and
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If
necessary, spray around the lid with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use radi-
ator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel
filler lid opener button.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank
cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-
ly and make sure that it is securely
closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
OHG040026L
OHG040027
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
429
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fab-
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static elec-
tricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-
line source.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
(Continued)
WARNING - Refueling dan-
gers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines care-
fully. Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warnings at
the gas station facility.
• Before refueling note the location
of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-
Off, if available, at the gas station
facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Use only approved portable plas-
tic fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cel-
lular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
304
Emergency fuel filler lid release
(if equipped)
If the fuel filler lid does not open using
the remote fuel filler lid release, you can
open it manually by pulling the handle
outward slightly.
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refuel-
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-
cle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire depart-
ment. Follow any safety instruc-
tions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel require-
ments" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle excessively,
otherwise the luggage area trim or
release handle may be damaged.
OHG040028
431
Features of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the over-
head console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
• After washing the car or after there is
rain, be sure to wipe off any water
that is on the sunroof before operating
it.
Sunshade
• To open the sunshade, press the sun-
shade control switch (1).
• To close the sunshade, press the sun-
shade control switch (2). If you press
the switch when the sunroof glass is
opened, the sunroof glass will close
then the sunshade will close.
To stop the sliding at any point, press the
sunshade control switch momentarily.
✽
NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on the
blind because of its material character-
istic.
PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OHG041029L
CAUTION
Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sunroof
is fully opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or sun-
shade while driving. This could
result in loss of control and an acci-
dent that may cause death, serious
injury, or property damage.
OHG043030L
Features of your vehicle
324
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward, the sunshade will slide all the way
open then the sunroof glass will slide all
the way open. To stop the sunroof move-
ment at any point, pull or push the sun-
roof control lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward, the sunroof glass will slide all the
way open. To stop the sunroof movement
at any point, pull or push the sunroof con-
trol lever momentarily.
✽
NOTICE
Only the front glass of the panorama
sunroof opens and closes.
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide all the
way open then the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Closing the sunroof
Press the sunshade CLOSE button. The
sunroof glass will close then the sun-
shade will close. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, press the sun-
shade control switch momentarily.
If you want to close the sunroof glass
only, push the sunroof control lever. The
sunroof glass will close and the sun-
shade will not close. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push the
sunroof control lever momentarily.
OHG043196A
OHG040032
OHG043030
433
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detect-
ed while the sunroof glass or sunshade is
closing automatically, it will reverse the
direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding
glass or sunshade and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all passen-
gers and objects are away from the sun-
roof before closing it.
OYF049215
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that someone’s head,
hands and body are not trapped
by a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside through an
opened sunroof while driving.
• Make sure your hands and face
are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
• A panorama sunroof is made of
glass, therefore it may break in an
accident. If you do not have your
seat belt on, you may stick out of
the broken glass and get injured
or killed. For all passengers safe-
ty, have an appropriate protection
on (ex. seat belt, CRS, etc.).
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be dam-
aged.
• If you drive with the sunroof
opened right after a car wash or
rain, water may get inside the
vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
344
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, you must reset your sunroof sys-
tem as follows:
1.Turn the engine on and close the sun-
roof glass and sunshade completely.
2.Release the control lever.
3.Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close (about 10 sec-
onds) until the sunroof is moved a little.
Then, release the lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close until the sun-
roof operates as follows;
SUNSHADE OPEN → TILT OPEN →
SLIDE OPEN → SLIDE CLOSE →
SUNSHADE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
For more detailed information, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it may
not work properly.
OHGC042189
435
Features of your vehicle
A driver position memory system is pro-
vided to store and recall the driver’s seat,
outside rearview mirror and steering
wheel position or the instrument panel
illumination intensity with a simple button
operation. By saving the desired posi-
tions into the system memory, different
drivers can reposition the positions
based upon their driving preference. If
the battery is disconnected, the position
memory will be erased.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P (Park) while
the ignition switch is ON.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat, outside
rearview mirror, steering wheel posi-
tion and instrument panel illumination
intensity comfortable to the driver.
3. Press the SET button on the control
panel. The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or
2) within 5 seconds after pressing the
SET button. The system will beep
twice when memory has been suc-
cessfully stored.
5. "Driver 1(or 2) set is memorized" will
appear on the instrument cluster LCD
display.
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the driver
position memory system while the
vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property damage.
OHG040033
Features of your vehicle
364
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P (Park) while
the ignition switch is ON.
2. To recall the position in memory, press
the desired memory button (1 or 2).
The system will beep once, then the
driver’s seat, outside rearview mirror,
steering wheel and the instrument
panel illumination will automatically
adjust to the stored positions.
3. "Driver 1 (or 2) set is changed" will
appear on the instrument cluster LCD
display.
Adjusting the control switch for the dri-
ver’s seat, outside rearview mirror, steer-
ing wheel and the instrument panel illu-
mination while the system is recalling the
stored position will cause the movement
to stop and move in the direction that the
control switch is moved.
Easy access function
(if equipped)
With the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-
tion, the system will move the driver's
seat and steering wheel automatically so
you can comfortably enter and exit the
vehicle.
• Without smart key system
- The steering wheel will move away
from the driver and the seat will move
rearward, when the ignition key is
removed and the driver’s door is
opened.
- The steering wheel will move toward
the driver and the seat will move for-
ward, when the ignition key is insert-
ed.
• With smart key system
- The steering wheel will move away
from the driver and the seat will move
rearward, when the ENGINE START/
STOP button is in the OFF position
and the driver’s door is opened.
- The steering wheel will move toward
the driver and the seat will move for-
ward, when the ENGINE START/
STOP button is in the ACC position.
You can activate or deactivate this fea-
ture. Refer to “Vehicle Option" in this
chapter.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling adjust-
ment memory while sitting in the
vehicle. Push the seat position con-
trol switch to the desired position
immediately if the seat moves too
far in any direction.
437
Features of your vehicle
Power steering
Power steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the vehi-
cle. If the engine is off or if the power
steering system becomes inoperative,
the vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steer-
ing checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽
NOTICE
If the power steering drive belt breaks
or if the power steering pump malfunc-
tions, the steering effort will greatly
increase.
✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather (below -
10°C/14°F), the power steering may
require increased effort when the engine
is first started. This is caused by
increased fluid viscosity due to the cold
weather and does not indicate a mal-
function.
When this happens, increase the engine
RPM by depressing accelerator until the
RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release or
let the engine idle for two or three min-
utes to warm up the fluid.
Tilt steering
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You can
also raise it to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
STEERING WHEEL
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel
against a stop (extreme right or left
turn) for more than 5 seconds with
the engine running. Holding the
steering wheel for more than 5 sec-
onds in either position may cause
damage to the power steering
pump.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of the
steering wheel while driving. You
may lose steering control and
cause severe personal injury,
death or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
Features of your vehicle
384
Manual type
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2) and height (3), then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock the steering wheel in
place. Be sure to adjust the steering
wheel to the desired position before driv-
ing.
Electric type
Adjust the steering wheel angle (2) and
position (3) with the switch (1). Never
adjust the position of the steering wheel
while driving.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion, pressing the heated steering wheel
button warms the steering wheel. The
indicator on the button will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The indica-
tor on the button will turn off.
It will turn off automatically approximate-
ly 30 minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
OHG040189L OHG040035 OHG040037
CAUTION
Do not install any grip to operate
the steering wheel. This causes
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
439
Features of your vehicle
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel. Check the
horn regularly to be sure it operates
properly.
✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indi-
cated by the horn symbol on your steer-
ing wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
OHG040038
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharp-
pointed object.
Features of your vehicle
404
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to center on
the view through the rear window. Make
this adjustment before you start driving.
Day/night rearview mirror
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night driv-
ing.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
The electric chromic mirror automatically
controls the glare from the headlights of
the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and automati-
cally controls the headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into R
(Reverse), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehi-
cle.
MIRRORS
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liq-
uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-
ing.
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision through
the rear window.
OHG040039
Day
Night
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
441
Features of your vehicle
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn
the automatic dimming function on.
The mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
automatic dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON position
whenever the ignition switch is turned
on.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The mir-
ror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
OYF049233N
Indicator
Sensor
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-
ator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
WARNING - Rearview mir-
rors
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. In some countries, the
left outside rearview mirror is
also convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
Features of your vehicle
424
Adjusting the outside rearview mirror
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror the
ignition switch should be in the ACC posi-
tion. Move the lever (1) to R (right) or L
(left) to select the right side mirror or the
left side mirror, then press a correspon-
ding point on the mirror adjustment con-
trol to position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
After the adjustment, put the lever into
the neutral (center) position to prevent
inadvertent adjustment.
Folding/Unfolding the outside
rearview mirror (if equipped)
The outside rearview mirror can be fold-
ed or unfolded by pressing the switch as
below.
Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold automatical-
ly as follows:
• Without smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the
door is locked or unlocked by the
transmitter.
• With smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the
door is locked or unlocked by the
smart key.
OHG040044
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch is
pressed. Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
OHG040045
443
Features of your vehicle
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the
door is locked or unlocked by the but-
ton on the outside door handle.
- The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart key
in possession. (if equipped)
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
While the vehicle is moving backward,
the outside rearview mirror(s) will move
downward to aid reverse parking.
According to the position of the outside
rearview mirror switch (1), the outside
rearview mirror(s) will operate as follows:
L/R : When the remote control outside
rearview mirror switch is selected to
the L (left) or R (right) position, both
outside rearview mirrors will move
downward.
Neutral : When the remote control out-
side rearview mirror switch is
placed in the middle position,
the outside rearview mirrors
will not operate while the vehi-
cle is moving backward.
✽
NOTICE
The outside rearview mirrors will auto-
matically revert to their original posi-
tions under the following conditions:
1. Ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-
tion.
2. Shift lever is moved to any position
except R.
3. Remote control outside rearview mir-
ror switch is placed in the middle
position.
CAUTION
In case it is an electric type outside
rearview mirror, don’t fold it by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
CAUTION
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tion. However, to prevent unneces-
sary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than nec-
essary while the engine is not run-
ning.
OHG040034
Features of your vehicle
444
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Odometer/Trip computer*
5. Fuel gauge
6. Engine temperature gauge
7. Warning and indicator lights
* : if equipped
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
OHG040046L/OHG040047L
■ Type A
■ Type B
445
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel illumination
The instrument panel illumination intensi-
ty can be adjusted by pushing the control
switch up or down with the headlight
switch in the parking light or headlight
position when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
The illumination intensity is shown on the
instrument cluster LCD display.
OHG040048
■ Type A
■ Type A´
OHG040049/OHG040049N/OHG040050/OHG040050N/OHG040050C
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in kilometers per hour and/or miles per hour.
■ Type B
■ Type B´
■ Type B
´´
WARNING
Never adjust the instrument cluster
while driving. This could result in
loss of control and lead to an acci-
dent that may cause death, serious
injury, or property damage.
Features of your vehicle
464
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approxi-
mate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“H” position, it indicates overheat-
ing that may damage the engine.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
OHG040051
OHG040052
■ Type A
■ Type B
OHG040053
■ Type A ■ Type B
447
Features of your vehicle
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
tion 8.
The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which will illumi-
nate when the fuel tank is near empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier than
usual due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OHG040054
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
E level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
484
LCD display
The Trip computer, Vehicle option,
Maintenance system, Warnings, etc. are
displayed on the LCD display.
To change between groups, press the
DISP button.
To change between modes in groups,
press the or button.
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving on
the display when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. All stored driving infor-
mation (except odometer) is reset if the
battery is disconnected.
Press the DISP button to change
between modes.
Odometer (km or mi.)
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
OHG040055 OHG040056L
TRIP A
TRIP B
Average speed
Elapsed time
Distance to empty
Average fuel economy /
Instant fuel economy
■ Type A ■ Type B
449
Features of your vehicle
Tripmeter (km or mi.)
TRIP A : Tripmeter A
TRIP B : Tripmeter B
This mode indicates the distance of indi-
vidual trips selected since the last trip-
meter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
9999.9 km (0.0 to 9999.9 miles).
Pressing the DISP button for more than 1
second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or
TRIP B) is being displayed, clears the
tripmeter to zero (0.0).
Distance to empty (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 50 km (30
miles), “---” will be displayed and the dis-
tance to empty indicator will blink.
The meter’s working range is from 50 to
999 km (30 to 999 miles).
Average fuel economy
(l/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the average fuel
economy from the total fuel used and the
distance since the last average con-
sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-
culated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 50 m (0.03 miles).
Pressing the DISP button for more than 1
second, when the average fuel economy
is being displayed, clears the average fuel
economy to zero (---).
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after
refueling more than 6 l, the average fuel
consumption will be cleared to zero (---).
You can activate or deactivate the feature,
resetting the average fuel economy after
refueling more than 6 l.
Refer to "Vehicle Option" in this chapter.
OHG040057L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040058L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040060L
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
504
Instant fuel economy
(l/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the instant fuel
consumption every 0.4 seconds from the
driving distance and quantity of fuel
injection.
Average speed (km/h or MPH)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
Pressing the DISP button for more than 1
second, when the average speed is
being displayed, clears the average
speed to zero (---).
Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time trav-
eled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going while the engine
is running.
The meter’s working range is from
00:00~99:59.
Pressing the DISP button for more than 1
second, when the driving time is being
displayed, clears the driving time to zero
(00:00).
OHG040061L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040062L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040063L
■ Type A ■ Type B
451
Features of your vehicle
Vehicle option
1. When the vehicle is at a standstill,
pressing the DISP button for more
than 2 seconds with the ignition switch
in the ON position or engine running,
the LCD display on the cluster will
change to the “Vehicle Option” group.
2. You can change the item by pressing
the or button and choose an
item by pressing the DISP button.
Auto door lock
Off - The auto door lock operation will be
canceled.
Speed - All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 15 km/h (9.3 mph).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally locked if the shift lever
is shifted from the P (Park)
position to the R (Reverse),
N (Neutral) or D (Drive)
position.
Auto door unlock
Off - The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
Key Out - All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key
is removed from ignition switch
(or smart key is in the OFF
position).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally unlocked if the shift
lever is shifted to the
P(Park) position.
Door - All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the driver's door is
unlocked.
Seat Easy Access (only for Driver
Position Memory System equipped
vehicle)
On - The driver's seat will automatically
move forward or rearward for the
driver to enter or exit the vehicle
comfortably.
Off - The Seat Easy Access function will
be inactivated.
Steering Easy Access (only for Driver
Position Memory System equipped
vehicle)
On - The steering wheel will automatical-
ly move away or toward the driver
for the driver to enter or exit the
vehicle comfortably.
Off - The Steering Easy Access function
will be inactivated.
OHG040064L
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
524
Headlamp Escort
On - The Headlamp Escort and
Headlamp Welcome function will be
activated.
Off - The Headlamp Escort and
Headlamp Welcome function will be
inactivated.
Welcome Light (if equipped)
On - When all the doors(and trunk) are
locked and closed, if you approach
the vehicle with a smart key in pos-
session the puddle lamp and door
handle lamp will come on for about
15 seconds.
Off - The Welcome Light function will be
inactivated.
Welcome Sound
On - The Welcome Sound function will
be activated.
Off - The Welcome Sound function will
be inactivated.
Auto Triple Turn (One-touch triple
turn signal)
On - The lane change signals will blink 3
times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
Off - The Auto Triple Turn function will be
inactivated.
AVG fuel economy
Auto Reset - The average fuel economy
will reset automatically
when you drive after refuel-
ing.
Manual Reset - The average fuel econo-
my will not reset auto-
matically when you drive
after refueling.
Ambient lighting
The brightness of the ambient light may
be adjusted.
• 5 stage : Off / Level 1 / Level 2 / Level 3 /
Level 4
453
Features of your vehicle
Maintenance system
The Maintenance system informs the
driver when to replace engine oil and
rotate tires.
Maintenance
1. When the vehicle is at a standstill,
pressing the DISP button for more
than 2 seconds with the ignition switch
in the ON position or engine running,
the LCD display on the cluster will
change to the "Maintenance" group.
You can move to an item by pressing the
or button and select the item by
pressing the DISP button.
2. Select the desired maintenance
schedule.
3. If finished, you can come out of the
“Maintenance” group by pressing the
DISP button for more than 2 seconds.
OHG040065L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040066L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040067L
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
544
Warnings and indicators
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off. The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
Air bag warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
This light also comes on when the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is
not working properly. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not come on, or
continuously remains on after operating
for about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or start-
ed the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, have the SRS inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Seat belt warning
(if equipped)
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
For details, refer to the “Seat belt” in sec-
tion 3.
455
Features of your vehicle
Turn signal indicator
The blinking green arrows on the instru-
ment panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. Your dealer should be consult-
ed for repairs.
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
This light comes on when the front fog
lights are ON.
Rear fog light indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the rear
fog lights are ON.
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Low beam indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the low beam posi-
tion.
When the high beam indicator is ON, the
low bean indicator will turn off and low
beam light remains on.
Tail light indicator
This indicator illuminates when the tail
lights are on.
Features of your vehicle
564
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning light
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released while the engine is run-
ning.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have the vehicle towed to any author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake sys-
tem inspection and necessary repairs.
CAUTION
If the engine does not stop immedi-
ately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer before
the car is driven again.
457
Features of your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-
nal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short
a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes fail
while you are driving, shift to a lower gear
for additional engine braking and stop the
car as soon as it is safe to do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
(if equipped)
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned ON and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-
ing normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a malfunction with the
ABS.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but with-
out the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.
Electronic brake
force distribution
(EBD) system
warning light
If two warning lights illuminate at the
same time while driving, your vehicle
may have a malfunction with the ABS
and EBD system. In this case, your ABS
and regular brake system may not work
normally. Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
✽
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-
ing light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. In this case, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, have the
brakes checked and repaired imme-
diately by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING
If both ABS and brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-
cle’s brake system will not work
normally during sudden braking. In
this case, avoid high speed driving
and abrupt braking. Have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
Features of your vehicle
584
Automatic transaxle shift
indicator (if equipped)
The indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift lever is selected.
Low washer fluid level
warning light (if equipped)
This warning light indicates the washer
fluid reservoir is near empty. Refill the
washer fluid as soon as possible.
Charging system warning
light
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-
lem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem
as soon as possible.
Door ajar warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely.
Trunk lid open warning
light
This warning light illuminates when a
trunk lid is not closed securely with the
ignition in any position.
P
459
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
Without smart key system
This light illuminates when the immobiliz-
er key is inserted and turned to the ON
position to start the engine.
At this time, you can start the engine.The
light goes out after the engine is running.
If this light blinks when the ignition switch
is in the ON position before starting the
engine, have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
With smart key system (if equipped)
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immobi-
lizer indicator illuminates, blinks or the
light goes off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the ENGINE START/STOP button is
turned to the ACC or ON position, the
indicator will illuminate. However, when
the smart key is not in the vehicle, if the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
depressed, the indicator will blink for a
few minutes to indicate that you will not
be able to start the engine.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP but-
ton is changed to the ON position and
the indicator turns off after 2 seconds,
the system may have a problem. Have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• When the battery is weak, if the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed, the indicator will blink and you
will not be able to start the engine.
However, you may still be able to start
the engine by directly pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button with the
smart key. If smart key system related
parts have a problem, the indicator will
blink.
Engine coolant tempera-
ture warning light
(if equipped)
The warning light illuminates if the tem-
perature of the engine coolant is above
125±2.5°C (257±4.5°F).
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “Overheating” in section 6.
✽
NOTICE
If the engine coolant temperature warn-
ing light illuminates, it indicates over-
heating that may damage the engine.
Features of your vehicle
604
Low fuel level warning light
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
Malfunction indicator light
(MIL) (check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indi-
cates that a potential malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the emis-
sion control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
while driving, or does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, take your vehicle to your near-
est authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.
CAUTION
Prolonged driving with the
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION
If the Malfunction Indicator Light
illuminates, potential catalytic con-
verter damage is possible which
could result in loss of engine
power. Have the Engine Control
System inspected as soon as pos-
sible by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
461
Features of your vehicle
ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) indicator
(if equipped)
The ESP indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds. When the ESP is on, it monitors the
driving conditions. Under normal driving
conditions, the ESP indicator will remain
off. When a slippery or low traction con-
dition is encountered, the ESP will oper-
ate, and the ESP indicator will blink to
indicate the ESP is operating.
But, if the ESP system malfunctions the
indicator illuminates and stays on. Take
your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
ESP OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The ESP OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESP OFF mode,
press the ESP OFF button. The ESP
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESP is deactivated.
EPB (Electric Parking
Brake) malfunction indica-
tor (if equipped)
The EPB malfunction indicator will illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is turned
ON, but should go off after approximate-
ly 3 seconds. If the warning light does not
come on, or continuously remains on
take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
Also, the EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESP indicator comes
on to indicate that the ESP is not working
properly, but if this occurs, it does not
indicate the EPB has malfunctioned.
AUTO HOLD indicator
(if equipped)
If you press the AUTO HOLD switch, the
AUTO HOLD indicator on the cluster
comes on white. And when you stop the
vehicle completely by pressing the brake
pedal, the indicator changes from white
to green.
If the AUTO HOLD malfunction indicator
lights up yellow, the AUTO HOLD is not
working properly. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked.
For more information, refer to “AUTO
HOLD” in section 5.
AUTO
HOLD
EPB
Features of your vehicle
624
Cruise indicator
(if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster is illuminated when the
cruise control ON-OFF button on the
steering wheel is pushed.
The indicator light turns off when the
cruise control ON-OFF button is pushed
again. For more information about the
use of cruise control, refer to “Cruise
control system or Smart cruise control
system” in section 5.
Cruise SET indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise function switch (SET- or RES+) is
ON. The cruise SET indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illuminated when
the cruise control switch (SET- or RES+)
is pushed. The cruise SET indicator light
does not illuminate when the cruise con-
trol switch (CANCEL) is pushed or the
system is disengaged.
Smart cruise control indicator
(if equipped)
SCC (Smart cruise control)
malfunction indicator
The warning light illuminates when the
vehicle to vehicle distance function does
not operate properly.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
SCC (Smart cruise control)
sensor malfunction indicator
If the sensor or cover is stained with for-
eign matter such as snow, the indicator
will illuminate. Remove the stains around
the sensor by using a soft cloth.
For more information about the use of
smart cruise control, refer to "Smart
cruise control system" in section 5.
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) indicator (if equipped)
Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
The low tire pressure telltale/TPMS mal-
function indicator comes on for 3 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned to
the "ON" position.
The TPMS malfunction indicator will illu-
minate after it blinks for approximately 1
minute when there is a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If this occurs, have the system checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
For details, refer to the “TPMS” in section
6.
SET
CRUISE
■ Type A ■ Type B
463
Features of your vehicle
Overspeed warning
(if equipped)
Overspeed warning light
If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or
more, the overspeed warning light will
blink. This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
Overspeed warning chime (if equipped)
If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or
more, the overspeed warning chime will
sound for about 5 seconds. This is to pre-
vent you from driving your vehicle with
overspeed.
LCD display warning (if equipped)
Key is not in vehicle
If the smart key is not in the vehicle and
if any door is opened or closed with the
ENGINE START/STOP button in the
ACC, ON, or START position, the warn-
ing illuminates on the LCD display. Also,
the chime sounds for 5 seconds when
the smart key is not in the vehicle and the
door is closed.
Always have the smart key with you.
120
km/h
WARNING
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and can
contribute to loss of vehicle control
and increased braking distances.
Continued driving on low pressure
tires will cause the tires to overheat
and fail.
WARNING - Safe stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes
gradually and with light force,
and slowly move to a safe posi-
tion off the road.
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040072L
Features of your vehicle
644
Key not detected
If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is
not detected and you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button, the warning illumi-
nates on the LCD display for 10 seconds.
Also, the immobilizer indicator blinks for
10 seconds.
Low key battery
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
changes to the OFF position when the
smart key in the vehicle discharges, the
warning illuminates on the LCD display
for about 10 seconds. Also, the warning
chime sounds once.
Replace the battery with a new one.
Press brake pedal to start engine
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
changes to the ACC position twice by
pressing the button repeatedly without
depressing the brake pedal, the warning
illuminates on the LCD display for about
10 seconds to indicate that you should
depress the brake pedal to start the
engine.
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040073L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040075L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040076L
465
Features of your vehicle
Shift to "P" position
If you try to turn off the engine without the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button changes
to the ACC position. If the button is
pressed once more it will change to the
ON position. The warning illuminates on
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to
indicate that you should press the
ENGINE START/STOP button with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position to turn
off the engine.
Also, the warning chime sounds for about
10 seconds. (if equipped)
Press start button again
If you can not operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button when there is a
problem with the ENGINE START/STOP
button system, the warning illuminates
for 10 seconds and the chime sounds to
indicate that you could start the engine
by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP
button once more.
The chime will stop if the ENGINE
START/STOP button system works nor-
mally or the theft alarm system is armed.
If the warning illuminates each time you
press the ENGINE START/STOP button,
take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine
If you try to start the engine with the shift
lever not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position, the warning illuminates for
about 10 seconds on the LCD display.
You can also start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position, but
for your safety start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040077L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040078L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040079L
Features of your vehicle
664
Press start button while turn steering
If the steering wheel does not unlock nor-
mally when the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed, the warning illumi-
nates for 10 seconds on the LCD display.
Also, the warning chime sounds once
and the ENGINE START/STOP button
light blinks for 10 seconds.
When you are warned, press the
ENGINE START/STOP button while turn-
ing the steering wheel right and left.
Check steering wheel lock
If the steering wheel does not lock nor-
mally when the ENGINE START/STOP
button changes to the OFF position, the
warning illuminates for 10 seconds on
the LCD display. Also, the warning chime
sounds for 3 seconds and the ENGINE
START/STOP button light blinks for 10
seconds.
Please press start button with smart key
If you press the ENGINE START/ STOP
button while the warning “Key is not
detected” illuminates the warning “Please
press the start button with smart key” illu-
minates for 10 seconds on the LCD dis-
play. Also, the immobilizer indicator blinks
for 10 seconds.
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040080L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040081L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040074L
467
Features of your vehicle
Check stop lamp fuse
When the stop lamp fuse is disconnect-
ed, the warning illuminates for 10 sec-
onds on the LCD display.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If that
is not possible you can start the engine
by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP
button for 10 seconds in ACC.
Door /Trunk open
This indicator displays which door (or
trunk) is opened.
Illumination
The illumination intensity of the instru-
ment panel is shown when adjusting it
with the illumination control switch.
Parking assist warning
Displays the area an obstacle is detected
while moving forward or rearward.
Low washer liquid
This warning light illuminates for 12 sec-
onds when the washer fluid reservoir is
nearly empty. Refill the washer fluid as
soon as possible.
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040082L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040084
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040085L
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG040086
■ Type A ■ Type B
OHG044087A
Features of your vehicle
684
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement of
the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47
in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a
supplemental system and it is not intend-
ed to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limit-
ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
Rear parking assist system OFF
button (if equipped)
OHG042091C
OHG042192C
OHG042193C
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type C
OHG040088
Sensor
Sensor
s
s
WARNING
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
while backing up.
469
Features of your vehicle
To turn off the rear parking assist system,
push the button (the indicator light will
illuminate).
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition switch ON.
• The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound and indicator
✽
NOTICE
• The indicator may differ from the
illustration according to the objects or
sensors status.
• If the indicator blinks, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• The actual indicator in the vehicle
may be different from the illustration.
Types of warning sound
Indicator
Type A Type B
When an object is 120 cm
to 81 cm (47 in. to 32 in.)
from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently.
When an object is 80 cm
to 41 cm (31 in. to 16 in.)
from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps more fre-
quently.
When an object is within
40 cm (15 in.) of the rear
bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuous-
ly.
Features of your vehicle
704
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system may
not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when the moisture
has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate
normally when the material is removed
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-
ent).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones
are within range of the sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water. (The sens-
ing range will return to normal when
removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
The following objects may not be rec-
ognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-
sor frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
(40 in.) in height and narrower than 14
cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system pre-
cautions
• The rear parking assist system may
not sound sequentially depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor per-
formance.
• The sensor may not recognize objects
less than 25 cm (9 in.) from the sensor,
or it may sense an incorrect distance.
Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor. Sensor damage could occur.
471
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the vehi-
cle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more of
the below occurs you may have a mal-
function in the rear parking assist sys-
tem.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual
inspection to make sure the vehicle
is clear of all obstructions before
moving the vehicle in any direction.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
(blinks)
• is displayed. (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
724
The parking assist system assists the
driver during movement of the vehicle by
chiming if any object is sensed within the
distance of 100 cm (39 in.) in front and
120 cm (47 in.) behind the vehicle. This
system is a supplemental system and it
is not intended to nor does it replace the
need for extreme care and attention of
the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limited.
Whenever moving pay as much attention
to what is in front and behind of you as
you would in a vehicle without a parking
assist system.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The parking assist system should
only be considered as a supple-
mentary function. The driver must
check the front and rear view. The
operational function of the parking
assist system can be affected by
many factors and conditions of the
surroundings, so the responsibility
rests always with the driver.
OHG042089C
OHG040088
S
S
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
■ Front
■ Rear
S
S
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
OHG040091/OHG040192L/OHG040193L
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type C
473
Features of your vehicle
Operation of the parking assist
system
Operating condition
• This system activates when the park-
ing assist button is pressed with the
ignition switch ON.
• The parking assist button turns on
automatically and activates the parking
assist system when you shift the gear
to the R (Reverse) position. It will turn
off automatically when you shift out of
R (Reverse) and drive above 20 km/h.
However, the parking assist system will
not activated even if the vehicle speed
is below 20 km/h again. To activate the
system again, press the button.
• The sensing distance while backing up
is approximately 100 cm (39 in.) when
you are driving less than 10 km/h.
• The sensing distance while moving for-
ward is approximately 60 cm (24 in.)
when you are driving less than 10
km/h.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
✽
NOTICE
It may not operate if it’s distance from
the object is already less than approxi-
mately 25 cm when the system is ON.
✽
NOTICE
• The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration accord-
ing to objects or sensor status.
• Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.
Type of warning indicator and sound
: with Warning sound
Distance from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
100cm~61cm Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
120cm~61cm Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
60cm~31cm
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
30cm
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Features of your vehicle
744
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not oper-
ate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen on the sensor. (It will
operate normally when moisture
melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter,
such as snow or water, or the sensor
cover is blocked. (It will operate nor-
mally when the material is removed or
the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign matter
such as snow or water. (Sensing range
will return to normal when removed.)
4.The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces such
as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or
gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes can inter-
fere with the sensor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease when:
1. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
and narrower than 14 cm in diameter.
The following objects may not be rec-
ognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sensor
frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
CAUTION
• This system can only sense
objects within the range and loca-
tion of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other
areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim
objects, such as poles or objects
located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
• Be sure to inform any drivers of
the vehicle that may be unfamiliar
with the system regarding the
systems capabilities and limita-
tions.
475
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound sequen-
tially depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
2. The parking assist system may mal-
function if the vehicle bumper height
or sensor installation has been modi-
fied. Any non-factory installed equip-
ment or accessories may also interfere
with the sensor performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects less
than 30 cm from the sensor, or it may
sense an incorrect distance. Use with
caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow or water, the sensor may be
inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor with any hard objects that could
damage the surface of the sensor.
Sensor damage could occur.
✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors,
it can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, or objects located
between sensors may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more of
the below occurs you may have a mal-
function in the rear parking assist sys-
tem.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants related to a parking assist
system. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual
inspection to make sure the vehicle
is clear of all obstructions before
moving the vehicle in any direction.
(blinks)
• is displayed. (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
764
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through
the AV monitor while backing-up.
✽
NOTICE
The rearview camera may not operate
normally, when you drive in the
extremely high or low temperature
area. (operating temperature: -30°C ~
75°C (-22°F ~ 167°F))
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. This
causes all turn signal lights to blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate even
though the key is not in the ignition
switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
OHG040109
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
OHG043095
WARNING
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always
check the inside/outside rearview
mirror and the area behind the
vehicle before and while backing
up because there is a dead zone
that can't be seen through the
camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered with
foreign matter, the camera may
not operate normally.
477
Features of your vehicle
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key (smart
key: turns off the engine) and opens
the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
(smart key: turns off the engine) per-
form the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC
or OFF position with the headlights ON,
the headlights (and/or tail lights) remain
on for about 5 minutes. However, if the
driver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 15 sec-
onds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmit-
ter (or smart key) twice or turning the
light switch to the OFF or parking light
position.
Headlight welcome function
When the headlight is ON or AUTO posi-
tion and all doors (and trunk) are closed
and locked, if you press the door unlock
button on the transmitter (or the smart
key), the headlights will come on for
about 15 seconds. At this time, if you
press the door lock or unlock button, the
headlights will turn off immediately.
LIGHTING
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors, the battery
saver function does not operate.
Therefore, it causes the battery to
be discharged. In this case, make
sure to turn off the lamp before get-
ting out of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
784
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the parking
light position, the tail, license and instru-
ment panel lights are ON and the tail light
indicator is ON. (if equipped)
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position, the head, tail and license lights
are ON.
✽
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
OHG040110 OHG040111 OHG040112
479
Features of your vehicle
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light outside
the vehicle.
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
OHG040113 OHG040115
CAUTION
• Never place anything over sensor
(1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work prop-
erly.
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other dri-
ver's vision.
Features of your vehicle
804
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
Turn signals and lane change sig-
nals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-
ment panel indicate which turn signal is
operating. They will self-cancel after a
turn is completed. If the indicator contin-
ues to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
One-touch triple turn signal
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch triple turn signal
move the turn signal lever slightly and
then release it. The lane change signals
will blink 3 times.
You can activate or deactivate this fea-
ture. Refer to "Vehicle Option" in this
chapter.
✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, a bulb may be burned out or
have a poor electrical connection in the
circuit.
OHG040116OHG040114
481
Features of your vehicle
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility and avoid accidents when visibil-
ity is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc.
The fog lights will turn on when fog light
switch (1) is turned to ON after the park-
ing light is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch
to OFF.
Rear fog light (if equipped)
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the
headlight switch to the headlight on posi-
tion and turn the rear fog light switch (1)
to the on position.
Also, the rear fog lights turn on when the
rear fog light switch is turned on after the
front fog light switch is turned on and the
headlight switch is in the parklight posi-
tion.
To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the rear
fog light switch to the on position again or
turn the headlight switch off.
✽
NOTICE
To turn on the rear fog light switch, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position.
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Manual type
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of passengers
and loading weight in the luggage area,
turn the beam leveling switch.
The higher the number of the switch
position, the lower the headlight beam
level. Always keep the headlight beam at
the proper leveling position, or headlights
may dazzle other road users.
Listed below are the examples of proper
switch settings. For loading conditions
other than those listed below, adjust the
switch position so that the beam level
may be the nearest as the condition
obtained according to the list.
OHG040117
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor or
unnecessary battery and generator
drain could occur.
OHG040187LOHG041190L
Features of your vehicle
824
Automatic type
It automatically adjusts the headlight
beam level according to the number of
passengers and loading weight in the
luggage area.
And it offers proper headlight beam
under various conditions.
Headlight washer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the head-
light washer it will be operating at the
same time when you operate the wind-
shield washer. It will operate when the
headlight switch is in the first or second
position and the ignition switch or
ENGINE START/STOP button is in the
ON position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed on to the
headlights.
✽
NOTICE
• Check the headlight washers periodi-
cally to confirm that the washer fluid
is being sprayed properly onto the
headlight lenses.
• The headlight washer can be operated
15 minutes after being operated last
time.
Loading condition Switch position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front passenger 0
Full passengers 1
Full passengers +
Maximum permissible
loading
2
Driver + Maximum permis-
sible loading
3
WARNING
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined back-
ward according to passenger's
posture, or the headlight beam is
irradiated to the high or low posi-
tion, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
483
Features of your vehicle
Windshield wiper/washer
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST / – Single wipe
· OFF / O – Off
· INT (---) / AUTO – Intermittent wipe/
Auto control wipe (if equipped)
· LO / 1 – Normal wiper speed
· HI / 2 – Fast wiper speed
B : Intermittent or Auto control wipe
time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
MIST /
: For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this ( /
MIST) position and release it
with the lever in the OFF posi-
tion. The wipers will operate
continuously if the lever is held
in this position.
OFF / O : Wiper is not in operation.
INT / --- : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in a light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
LO / 1 : Normal wiper speed
HI / 2 : Fast wiper speed
✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or ice
before using the wiper and washer, it
may damage the wiper and washer sys-
tem.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OHG040118/OHG040118L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
844
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windshield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper
will operate once to perform a self-check
of the system. Set the wiper to OFF (O)
position when the wiper is not in use.
OHG040120
R
R
a
a
i
i
n
n
s
s
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
OHG040120L
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON and
the windshield wiper switch is
placed in the AUTO mode, use cau-
tion in the following situations to
avoid any injury to the hands or
other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of the
windshield glass facing the rain
sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the
windshield glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the wind-
shield glass.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the OFF (O) position
to stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be dam-
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode while washing the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the pas-
senger side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the OFF (O)
position. Otherwise, wipers may
operate and ice may damage the
windshield wiper blades. Always
remove all snow and ice and defrost
the windshield properly prior to
operating the windshield wipers.
■ Type A
■ Type B
R
R
a
a
i
i
n
n
s
s
e
e
n
n
s
s
o
o
r
r
485
Features of your vehicle
Windshield washers
In the OFF (O) position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer fluid
on the windshield and to run the wipers
1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
contact with the windshield and
obscure your vision.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers and washer system,
use anti-freezing washer fluids in
the winter season or cold weath-
er.
OHG040121
OHG040121L
■ Type B
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
864
INTERIOR LIGHT
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn off
approximately 20 minutes after the igni-
tion switch is turned off.
If your vehicle is equipped with the theft
alarm system, the interior lights automat-
ically turns off approximately 5 seconds
after the system is in the armed stage.
Map lamp
• , : Press the switch to turn
the map lamp on or off.
This light produces a spot
beam for convenient use
as a map lamp at night or
as a personal lamp for the
driver and the front pas-
senger.
• DOOR : In the DOOR position, the
map lamp and the room lamp
come on when any door is
opened regardless of the igni-
tion switch position. When
doors are unlocked by the
transmitter (or smart key), the
map lamp and the room lamp
come on for approximately 30
seconds as long as any door
is not open.
The map lamp and the room
lamp goes out gradually after
approximately 30 seconds if
the door is closed. However, if
the ignition switch is ON or all
doors are locked, the map
lamp and the room lamp will
turn off immediately. If a door is
opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or LOCK position,
the map lamp and the room
lamp stays on for about 20 min-
utes. However, if a door is
opened with the ignition switch
in the ON position, the map
lamp and the room lamp stays
on continuously.
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
OHG040122
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
487
Features of your vehicle
• OFF : The lights turn off even if a door
is opened.
• ROOM : The map lamp and the room
lamp stay on at all times.
Room lamp
To turn the room lamp push the switch or
lens.
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on for 20
minutes when the trunk is opened.
OHG040125
CAUTION
Do not leave the lamp switches on
for an extended period of time when
the vehicle is not running.
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the trunk lid
securely after using the trunk room.
OHG040123
OHG040124
■ Type B
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
884
Door courtesy lamp
(if equipped)
The door courtesy lamp comes ON when
the door is opened to assist entering or
exiting the vehicle. It also serves as a
warning to passing vehicles that the vehi-
cle door is open.
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
The parking lights or headlights must be
ON for the glove box lamp to function.
Vanity mirror lamp
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror light.
OHG040127 OHG040128
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the glove box
securely after using the glove box.
OHG040126
489
Features of your vehicle
Welcome light (if equipped)
Puddle lamp
When all the doors (and trunk) are locked
and closed, the puddle lamp will come on
for about 15 seconds if any of the below
is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside door
handle is pressed.
- When the vehicle is approached with
the smart key in possession.
Also, if the outside rearview mirror folding
switch is in the AUTO position, the out-
side rearview mirror will unfold automati-
cally.
Door handle lamp
When all the doors (and trunk) are locked
and closed, the door handle lamp will
come on for about 15 seconds if any of
the below is performed.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside door
handle is pressed.
- When the vehicle is approached with
the smart key in possession.
Escort welcome (if equipped)
When the headlight(light switch in the
headlight or AUTO position) is on and all
doors (and trunk) are locked and closed,
the position light and headlight will come
on for 15 seconds if/or any of the below
is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock or
unlock button, the position light and
headlight will turn off immediately.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and trunk)
are locked and closed, the room lamp will
come on for 30 seconds if any of the
below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside door
handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock or
unlock button, the room lamp will turn off
immediately.
You can activate or deactivate this fea-
ture. Refer to "Vehicle Option" in this
chapter.
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OHG040129
Features of your vehicle
904
DEFROSTER
✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
rear window, while the engine is running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before oper-
ating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the out-
side rearview mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on the
rear window defroster.
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the front
wiper deicer, it will operate at the same
time you operate the rear window
defroster.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
OHG040130
491
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Air conditioning button
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. Temperature control knob
4. Rear window defroster button
5. Air intake control button
6. Mode selection switch
7. Fan speed control switch
8. OFF button
OHG040131
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
Features of your vehicle
924
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heating
and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
OHG040133
493
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection switch controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of air directed
to the windshield and side window
defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OHG040132
Features of your vehicle
944
MAX A/C-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
To select the MAX A/C, turn the temper-
ature knob to the extreme left.
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and the
recirculated air position will be selected
automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flow-
ing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the pas-
senger compartment, turn the knob to
the right position for warm and hot air or
left position for cooler air.
OHG040134 OHG040136OHG040135
495
Features of your vehicle
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as fol-
lows:
1. Select mode.
2. Press the OFF button.
3. Press the air intake control button
( ) 5 times within 3 seconds.
The display will change from Centigrade
to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the temperature mode dis-
play will reset to Centigrade.
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to select
the outside (fresh) air position or recircu-
lated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
press the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from out-
side and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽
NOTICE
Driving on high speed with the recircu-
lation air position mode, fresh air may
enter the vehicle to ventilate the inside
air.
OHG040137
Features of your vehicle
964
✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessive-
ly dry air in the passenger compart-
ment.
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control switch allows you
to control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed:
• Press the part of the switch for
higher fan speed.
• Press the part of the switch for
lower fan speed.
OHG040138
WARNING
• Continue using the climate con-
trol system in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• Continue using the climate con-
trol system in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while driv-
ing.
497
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
Press the A/C (air conditioning) button to
turn the air conditioning system on (indi-
cator light will illuminate). Press the but-
ton again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system. However, you can
still operate the mode and air intake but-
tons as long as the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the
or position.
OHG040139 OHG042194C
Features of your vehicle
984
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the venti-
lation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irrita-
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position, set the mode control to
the MAX A/C position, then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
499
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehi-
cle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner exces-
sively, the difference between the tem-
perature of the outside air and that of
the windshield could cause the outer
surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this case,
set the mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan speed con-
trol to the lower speed.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OHM048209
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control air filter
Blower
Evaporator core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1004
✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty or rough
roads, more frequent air conditioner
filter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
impact on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
It is important that the correct type and
amount of oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, damage to the compressor
and abnormal system operation may
occur.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service
may cause serious injury to the
person performing the service.
4101
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Front windshield defroster button
2. Fan speed control knob
3. OFF button
4. Rear window defroster button
5. Dual temperature control selection button
6. Mode selection button
7. Passenger's temperature control switch
8. Air intake control button
9. Climate information screen selection
button
10. Driver’s temperature control switch
11. AUTO (automatic control) button
12. Air conditioning button
■■
Type A
■
Type B
OHG040140/OHG040141
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position
could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
Features of your vehicle
1024
Automatic heating and air condi-
tioning
1. Push the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically by setting the temperature.
2. Set the temperature to the desired
temperature.
✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button or switch of the fol-
lowing:
- Mode selection switch
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control knob
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate con-
trol, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 23°C (73°F).
✽
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
OHG040143OHG040142 OHG042184
4103
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air condition-
ing
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this case,
the system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons selected.
When pressing any button except the
AUTO button while using automatic oper-
ation, the functions not selected will be
controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heating
and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to con-
vert to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
OHG040133
Features of your vehicle
1044
Mode selection
The mode selection switch controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of air directed
to the windshield and side window
defrosters.
Bi-Level
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Floor & Defrost
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OHG040144 OHG040145
4105
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HIGH) by pressing part of
the switch.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (LOW) by pressing part of
the switch.
When pressing the switch, the tempera-
ture will increase or decrease by 0.5 °C.
When set to the lowest temperature set-
ting, the air conditioning will operate con-
tinuously.
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Pressing the right temper-
ature control button will automatically
switch to the DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the left temperature control to
adjust the driver side temperature.
Operate the right temperature control
to adjust the passenger side tempera-
ture.
When the driver side temperature is set
to the highest (HIGH) or lowest (LOW)
temperature setting, the DUAL mode is
deactivated for maximum heating or
cooling.
OHG040135 OHG040146OHG040184
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
Features of your vehicle
1064
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-
tivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver side
temperature.
2. Operate the driver’s side temperature
control switch. The driver and passen-
ger side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as fol-
lows:
While pressing the MODE button, press
the DUAL button for 3 seconds or more.
The display will change from Centigrade
to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the temperature mode dis-
play will reset to Centigrade.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
OHG040147
■ Type A
■ Type B
4107
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from out-
side and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽
NOTICE
Driving on high speed with the recircu-
lation air position mode, fresh air may
enter the vehicle to ventilate the inside
air.
✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessive-
ly dry air in the passenger compart-
ment.
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while driv-
ing.
Features of your vehicle
1084
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by turning the fan speed control
knob.
The higher the fan speed is, the more air
is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system. However, you can
still operate the mode and air intake but-
tons as long as the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
OHG040148 OHG040149 OHG040150
4109
Features of your vehicle
Climate information screen selection
(if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate infor-
mation on the screen.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the venti-
lation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irrita-
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
OHG040151
Features of your vehicle
1104
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehi-
cle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
4111
Features of your vehicle
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner exces-
sively, the difference between the tem-
perature of the outside air and that of
the windshield could cause the outer
surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this case,
set the mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan speed con-
trol to the lower speed.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty or rough
roads, more frequent air conditioner
filter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OHM048209
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control air filter
Blower
Evaporator core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1124
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
impact on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
It is important that the correct type and
amount of oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, damage to the compressor
and abnormal system operation may
occur.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service
may cause serious injury to the
person performing the service.
4113
Features of your vehicle
• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-
perature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, out-
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-
dows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up the
inside of the windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically. If the position is
selected, air conditioning will also be
selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected auto-
matically, press the corresponding button
manually.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The dif-
ference between the temperature of
the outside air and that of the wind-
shield could cause the outer sur-
face of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
or button to the position and
fan speed control knob or button to
the lower speed.
OHG040152
Features of your vehicle
1144
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-
tioning will be selected automatically.
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)
air position are not selected automatical-
ly, adjust the corresponding button man-
ually. If the position is selected,
lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher
fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
(HIGH) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower fan
speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
OHG040154 OHG040155OHG040153
4115
Features of your vehicle
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air intake
or air conditioning are controlled auto-
matically according to certain conditions
such as or position. To cancel or
return the defogging logic, do the follow-
ing.
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Press the defrost button ( ).
3. Press the air intake control button at
least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval.
It indicates that the defogging logic is
canceled or returned to the programmed
status.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Press the defrost button ( ).
3. While holding the air conditioning but-
ton (A/C) pressed, press the air intake
control button at least 5 times within 3
seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval.
It indicates that the defogging logic is
canceled or returned to the programmed
status.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
OHG040156 OHG040157
Features of your vehicle
1164
Auto defogging system
(Only for automatic climate control
system, if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibility of
fogging up the inside of the windshield by
automatically sensing the moisture of
inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is on.
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture
of inside the windshield and
operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher
steps operate as follow. For example if
auto defogging does not defog inside the
windshield at step 1 Outside air position,
it tries to defog again at step 2 Blowing
air toward the windshield.
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward the
windshield
Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 5 : Maximizing the air conditioning
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto
defogging system, it is automatically acti-
vated when the conditions are met.
However, if you would like to cancel the
auto defogging system, press the front
defroster button 4 times within 2 seconds
while pressing the AUTO button. The
indicator of front defroster button will
blink 3 times to notify you that the system
is cancelled. To use the auto defogging
system again, follow the procedures
mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected or
discharged, it resets to the auto defog-
ging status.
✽
NOTICE
If the A/C off or recirculated air position
is manually selected while the auto
defogging system is on, the auto defog-
ging indicator will blink 3 times to give
notice that the A/C off or recirculated air
position operation cannot be selected.
OHG040158
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
4117
Features of your vehicle
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or passengers.
Center console storage
To open the center console storage, pull
up the lever (1).
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a master key (or mechani-
cal key of smart key) (1).
To open the glove box, push the button
(2) and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
WARNING
- Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover cannot close
securely.
OHG040160OHG040159
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
Features of your vehicle
1184
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compart-
ment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
OHG040162
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass hold-
er. Such objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, pos-
sibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The
rear view mirror of the vehicle
can be blocked by an open sun-
glass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder to prevent
breakage or deformation of
glasses. It may cause personal
injury if you try to open it forcibly
when the glasses are jammed in
holder.
4119
Features of your vehicle
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter:
1. Open the cover by pressing the switch.
2. Push the lighter all the way into the
socket.
When the element has heated, the lighter
will pop out to the "ready" position.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette
lighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAI
replacement or its approved equivalent.
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
OHG040164OHG040163
CAUTION
Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums, and coffee pots, for
example) may damage the socket or
cause electrical failure.
WARNING
• Holding the lighter in after it is
heated will cause it to overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
• Do not insert foreign objects into
the socket of the cigarette lighter.
It may damage the cigarette
lighter.
Features of your vehicle
1204
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
OHGC042166
OHG040167
■ Front
■ Rear
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you could be burned.
Such a burn to the driver could
lead to loss of control of the vehi-
cle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncov-
ered or unsecured bottles, glass-
es, cans, etc., in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of direct
sun light and do not put them in a
vehicle that is heated up. It may
explode.
CAUTION
• Do not place uncovered cups or
unsecured bottles, cans, etc. with
liquid in the cup holder while the
vehicle is in motion. In a sudden
stop, the liquid may spill on the
vehicle's electrical devices and
cause electrical problems.
• Do not place cups, cans, etc. that
does not fit the cup holder. It may
damage the cup holder.
• Always close the cover when the
cup holder is not in use.
4121
Features of your vehicle
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull
it downward, unsnap it from the bracket
(1) and swing it to the side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or
backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-
ing a tollgate ticket.
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
CAUTION
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the accessory plug after use.
Using the accessory plug for pro-
longed periods of time with the
engine off could cause the battery
to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric
capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
OHG040169/OHG040190L/OHG040170
■ Front
•
•
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
B
B
•
•
T
T
y
y
p
p
e
e
A
A
■ Rear
OHG040168
WARNING
For your safety, do not block your
view when using the sunvisor.
Features of your vehicle
1224
Digital clock
Whenever the battery terminals or relat-
ed fuses are disconnected, you must
reset the time.
Detailed information on setting the clock
is described in Audio system section 4.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
To use the hanger, pull down the upper
portion of hanger.
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
OCM039200N
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
OUN026348
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while driv-
ing. You may lose your steering
control and cause an accident that
results in severe personal injury or
death.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-
ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get electrocuted or fire
may occur.
WARNING
Do not hang other objects except
clothes. In an accident it may cause
vehicle damage or personal injury.
4123
Features of your vehicle
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the holders located in
the cargo area to attach the luggage net.
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side
floor mat anchors that are designed
to securely hold the floor mat in
place.To avoid any interference with
pedal operation, HYUNDAI recom-
mends that only the HYUNDAI floor
mat designed for use in your vehi-
cle be installed.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to goods or the
vehicle, care should be taken when
carrying fragile or bulky objects in
the luggage compartment.
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net. ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of the
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT
use the luggage net when the strap
has visible signs of wear or dam-
age.
OHG040186L
Features of your vehicle
1244
Rear curtain (if equipped)
To fold the rear curtain, press the button.
To unfold the rear curtain, press the but-
ton again.
The rear curtain will fold automatically
when you shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) and unfold automatically when
you shift the shift lever from R (Reverse)
into P (Park).
After the rear curtain is folded by shifting
the shift lever into R (Reverse) and drive
more than 20 km/h with the shift lever in
D (Drive), the rear curtain will unfold
automatically.
Side curtain (if equipped)
To use the side curtain:
1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1).
2. Hang the curtain on both sides of the
hook.
CAUTION
Do not pull or fold the rear curtain by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
OHG040191L
OHG040174
■ Type A
■ Type B
OHG040176 OHG040177
4125
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner,
and air freshener from contacting the
interior parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
Glass antenna (if equipped)
When the radio power switch is turned on
while the ignition switch is in either the
“ON” or “ACC” position, your car will
receive both AM and FM broadcast sig-
nals through the antenna in the rear win-
dow glass.
AUDIO SYSTEM
OHG040178
CAUTION
• Do not clean the inside of the rear
window glass with a cleaner or
use a scraper to remove foreign
deposits as this may cause dam-
age to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and FM
broadcast signals.
CAUTION
• To prevent damage to the rear
glass antenna, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaner
containing abrasives to clean the
window. Clean the inside surface
of the rear glass window with a
piece of soft cloth.
• When putting a sticker on the
inside surface of the rear window,
be careful not to damage to the
rear glass antenna.
• Do not put sharp instruments
nearby the rear glass antenna.
• Tinted rear window may affect the
proper functioning of the anten-
na.
Features of your vehicle
1264
Steering wheel audio control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio control button
is installed to promote safe driving.
VOLUME (VOL +/-) (1)
• Push up the lever to increase volume.
• Push down the lever to decrease vol-
ume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for 0.8 seconds or more, it will work as
follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button. It will SEEK until you release the
button.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
CDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN
button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for less than 0.8 seconds, it will work as
follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
CDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is included in the following pages
in this section.
MODE (3)
Press the MODE button to select Fadio,
CD (Compact Disc) or CDC* (Compact
Disc Changer).
MUTE (4) (if equipped)
• Press the MUTE button to cancel the
sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to acti-
vate the sound.
OHG040179L
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote con-
trol buttons simultaneously.
4127
Features of your vehicle
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB
(universal serial bus) port or iPod
®
port,
you can use an aux port to connect audio
devices a USB port to plug in a USB, and
an iPod
®
port to plug in an iPod
®
.
✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal
is then received by the radio and sent to
your vehicle speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best pos-
sible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the dis-
tance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the pres-
ence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-
low the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmos-
phere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide bet-
ter signal coverage.
JBM002
AM radio reception
JBM001
FM radio reception
OHG040180L
Features of your vehicle
1284
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station.
Also, FM signals are easily affected by
buildings, mountains, or other obstruc-
tions. These can result in certain listening
conditions which might lead you to
believe a problem exists with your radio.
The following conditions are normal and
do not indicate radio trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves away
from the radio station, the signal will
weaken and sound will begin to fade.
When this occurs, we suggest that you
select another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the trans-
mitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering nois-
es to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the distur-
bance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-
est signal. If this occurs, select another
station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflect-
ed signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
JBM005JBM004JBM003
FM radio station
4129
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-
lar phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
Care of discs
• If the temperature inside the vehicle is
too high, open the vehicle windows for
ventilation before using your vehicle
audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from get-
ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure objects other than CDs are
not inserted into the CD player (Do not
insert more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, if you
still continue to use those CDs, they
may cause the malfunction of your
vehicle audio system.
✽
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your vehicle audio. Please note that if
you try to play copy protected CDs and
the CD player does not perform correct-
ly the CDs maybe defective, not the CD
player.
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone while
driving. Stop at a safe location to
use a cellular phone.
CAUTION
When using a communication sys-
tem such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adverse-
ly affect safe operation of the vehi-
cle.
Features of your vehicle
1304
AC110HG_CDP_BT / AC610HG_CDC_BT
■
CD Player : AC110HG/AC100HG
AC210HG/AC200HG
■
CD Changer : AC610HG/AC600HG
❋ There will be no logo if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
4131
Features of your vehicle
Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME
and AUDIO CONTROL
1. Button
Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 and
FM2 when the button is pressed each
time.
2. Button
Pressing the button selects the
AM band. AM Mode is displayed on the
LCD.
3. Button
• When the button is pressed,
it increases the band frequency to
automatically select channel. Stops at
the previous frequency if no channel is
found.
• When the button is press-
ed, it reduces the band frequency to
automatically select channel. Stops at
the previous frequency if no channel is
found.
4. Button (AUTO STORE
Button)
When the button is pressed, it automati-
cally selects and saves channels with
high reception rate to PRESET buttons
~ and plays the channel
saved in PRESET1. If no channel is
saved after AST, it will play the previous
channel.
• When the button is pressed for longer
than 0.8 second, it automatically scans
the radio preset station upwards.
• Press the button again to stop
the scan feature and to listen to the
currently selected channel.
5. Knob
If the knob is turned clockwise/counter-
clockwise, the volume will increase
/decrease.
6. Button
■ AC110/100/610/600HG
Press this button to turn to the SETUP
adjustment mode.
If no action is taken for 8 seconds after
pressing the button, it will return to the
play mode. (After entering SETUP mode,
select Manual , button
and push button)
The setup changes in the order of
Scroll ➟ SDVC ➟ Media ➟ Sound ➟
Phone ➟ Clock ➟ Scroll...
OK
TUNEFILE
SETUP
VOLUME
SCAN
61
AST
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
AM
AM
FM
AC110HG_CDP_BT
Features of your vehicle
1324
■ AC210/200HG
The setup Change in the order of
Scroll ➟ SDVC ➟ Media ➟ V-EQ ➟
Sound ➟ Phone ➟ Clock ➟➟
Scroll ...
• SCROLL
This function is used to display charac-
ters longer than the LCD text display and
can be turned On/Off through the
, button.
• SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
This function automatically adjusts the
volume level according to the speed of
the vehicle and can be turned On/Off
through the , button.
• MEDIA
Select default display of MP3 play infor-
mation. “Folder/File” or “Artist/Title” can
be selected.
• V-EQ
Press the , button to
select the Variable EQ the following
order : Innocente (Normal), Forza
(Dynamic), Concerto (Concert) select
and press the button to com-
plete and exit from Variable EQ setup
mode.
• SOUND
The Bass, Middle, Treble, Fader, Balance
mode. Press the , button
to select mode. After selecting each
mode, press , button.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, press the right
button, while to decrease the BASS,
press the left button.
TUNEFILE
FOLDER
FOLDER
OK
TUNEFILE
TUNEFILE
TUNEFILE
Features of your vehicle
4133
Features of your vehicle
MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, press the right
button, while to decrease the MIDDLE,
press the left button.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, press the right
button, while to decrease the TREBLE,
press the left button.
FADER Control
Press the right button to emphasize rear
speaker sound(front speaker sound will
be attenuated). When the left button is
pressed, front speaker sound will be
emphasized(rear speaker sound will be
attenuated).
BALANCE Control
Press the right button to emphasize right
speaker sound(left speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the left button is
pressed, left speaker sound will be
emphasized(right speaker sound will be
attenuated).
• PHONE
(if equipped)
Select this item to enter PHONE setup
mode. Refer to “BLUETOOTH PHONE
OPERATION” section for detailed infor-
mation.
❈ “PHONE” menu is not available if the
audio does not support
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology features.
• CLOCK
Select this item to enter Clock setup
mode. Adjust the hour using ,
button and press the
button.
Adjust the minute using ,
button and press the
button to complete and exit from clock
adjustment mode.
Press the button for more than 1
seconds while in power off/on, you can
enter the Clock setup mode directly.
• Return( )
This function displays the previous
MODE screen.
SETUP
OK
FOLDER
FOLDER
TUNE
FOLDER
FOLDER
AC110HG_CDP_BT
Features of your vehicle
1344
8. PRESET Buttons
Push ~ buttons less than 0.8
seconds to play the channel saved in
each button. Push Preset button for 0.8
seconds or longer to save current chan-
nel to the respective button with a beep.
9. Button
• Turns on/off the set when the IGNI-
TION SWITCH is on ACC or ON.
10. Button
Turn ON/OFF the displayed data and
light on LCD.
When LCD Display is turned OFF, Press
any button to turn ON display.
DISP
61
AC110HG_CDP_BT
4135
Features of your vehicle
Using CD Player
1. Button (CD)
If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode.
If no CD, it displays “No Media” for 3 sec-
onds and returns to the previous mode.
2. Button
• Press button for less than
0.8 seconds to play from the beginning
of current song.
• Press button for less than
0.8 seconds and press again within
1 second to play the previous song.
• Press button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to initiate reverse direction
high speed sound search of current
song.
• Press button for less than
0.8 seconds to play the next song.
• Press button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to initiate forward direction
high speed sound search of current
song.
3. Button
Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds.
To cancel SCAN Play, press this button
again.
4. Button
Press the button to play the
select song.
5. Button
Displays the information of the current
CD TRACK(FILE) as below when the
button is pressed each time.
• CDDA : Disc Title, Disc Artist, Track Title,
Track Artist, Total Track.
• MP3/WMA : File Name, Title, Artist,
Album, Folder, Total File.
(not displayed if the information is
not available on the DISC.)
6. Button (REPEAT)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds
to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more than 0.8
seconds to activate ‘FLD.RPT’ mode.
• RPT : Only a track(file) is repeatedly
played back.
• FLD.RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only files
in a folder are repeatedly played back.
❈ DISC RPT(CD Changer) : Repeats the
entire DISC when this button is pressed
for 0.8 seconds or longer.
7. Button (RANDOM)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds
to activate ‘RDM’ mode and longer than
0.8 seconds to activate ‘ALL RDM’ mode.
• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc are
played back in random sequence.
• ALL RDM(MP3/WMA Only) : All files in
a disc are played back in random
sequence.
2
RDM
1
RPT
INFO
OK
OK
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
TRACK
MEDIA
AC110HG_CDP_BTAC610HG_CDC_BT
AC110HG_CDP_BT
Features of your vehicle
1364
8. Button
(CD changer : AC610/600HG)
• Preset Change button changes
disc to the previous disc.
• Preset Change button changes
disc to the next disc.
9. Button (CD Eject)
Push button for less than 0.8
seconds to eject the CD during CD play-
back. This button is enabled when igni-
tion switch is off.
• ALL EJECT (CD Changer : AC610/
600HG)
Press this button for more than 0.8 sec-
onds to eject all discs inside the deck in
respective order.
10. CD Slot
Please face printed side upward and
gently push in. When the ignition switch
is on ACC or ON and power is off, power
is automatically turned on if the CD is
loaded. This CDP supports only 12cm
CD. If VCD, Data CD are loaded,
"Reading Error" message will appear
and CD will be ejected.
11. Button (CD changer :
AC610/600HG)
Push button to load CDs to avail-
able CDC deck (from 1~6). Push
button for more than 2 seconds to load
into all available decks. The last CD will
play. 10 seconds idle status will disable
loading process.
12. Button
• Press button to move to child
folder of the current folder and display
the first song in the folder.
Press button to move to the
folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Press button to move to par-
ent folder of the current folder and dis-
play the first song in the folder.
Press button to move to the
folder displayed.
13. Search Button
Press the button to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
press the button to display the
songs before to the currently played
song.
FILE
TUNE
OK
FOLDER
OK
FOLDER
FOLDER
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
6
DISC
5
DISC
DISC
AC610HG_CDC_BT
AC110HG_CDP_BT
4137
Features of your vehicle
Using USB device
1. Button (USB)
If USB is connected, it switches to the
USB mode from the other mode to play
the song files stored in the USB. If no CD
and auxiliary device is not connected, it
displays "No Media" for 3 seconds and
returns to the previous mode.
2. Button
• Press button for less than
0.8 seconds to play from the beginning
of current song.
• Press button for less than
0.8 seconds and press again within
1 second to play the previous song.
• Press button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to initiate reverse direction
high speed sound search of current
song.
• Press button for less than
0.8 seconds to play the next song.
• Press button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to initiate forward direction
high speed sound search of current
song.
3.
Button
Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds.
To cancel SCAN Play, press this button
again.
4. Button
Press the button to play the
select song.
5. Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of File Name,
Title, Artist, Album, Folder, Total File,
Normal Display.
(Displays no information if the file has no
song information.)
6. Button (REPEAT)
Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds to activate 'RPT' mode and longer
than 0.8 seconds to activate 'FLD.RPT'
mode.
• RPT : Only the current file is repeated-
ly played back.
• FLD.RPT : All files in a folder are
repeatedly played back.
7. Button (RANDOM)
Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘ALL RDM’
mode.
• FLD.RDM : Only files in a folder are
played back in a random sequence.
•
ALL RDM
: All files in a USB memory are
played back in the random sequence.
2
RDM
1
RPT
INFO
OK
OK
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
TRACK
MEDIA
AC110HG_CDP_BT
AC110HG_CDP_BTAC110HG_CDP_BT
Features of your vehicle
1384
8. Button
• Press button to move to child
folder of the current folder and display
the first song in the folder.
Press button to move to the
folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Press button to move to par-
ent folder display the first song in the
folder.
Press button to move to the
folder displayed.
9. Search Button
Press the button to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
press the button to display the
songs before to the currently played
song.
FILE
TUNE
OK
FOLDER
OK
FOLDER
FOLDER
AC110HG_CDP_BT
4139
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING
USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not con-
nected when starting up the vehi-
cle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electrici-
ty when connecting or disconnect-
ing the external USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the con-
nected external USB device can
be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recog-
nized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recog-
nizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact
with the human body or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or dis-
connect the USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnect-
ing a USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device can
be damaged or may malfunction.
Therefore, disconnect the external
USB device when the audio is
turned off or in another mode. (e.g,
Radio or CD)
• Depending on the type and capacity
of the external USB device or the
type of the files stored in the device,
there is a difference in the time
taken for recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for pur-
poses other than playing music files.
• Playing videos through the USB is
not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia termi-
nal of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
1404
(Continued)
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music files
on the highest-priority drive are
recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
❋
A car exclusive cable (sold sep-
arately) is required to use the
iPod
®
.
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT)
are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A SD-to-USB adapter may not
work with the car audio system.
• Please avoid using USB memory
products which can be used as
key chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug type
connector products as shown
below.
4141
Features of your vehicle
Using iPod
®
❋ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
1. Button (iPod
®
)
If iPod
®
is connected, it switches to the
iPod
®
mode from the previous mode to
play the song files stored in the iPod
®
.
If there is no iPod
®
connected, then it dis-
plays the message "No Media" for 3 sec-
onds and returns to the previous mode.
2. Button
• Press button for less than
0.8 seconds to play from the beginning
of current song.
• Press button for less than
0.8 seconds and press again within
1 second to play the previous song.
• Press button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to initiate reverse direction
high speed sound search of current
song.
• Press button for less than
0.8 seconds to play the next song.
• Press button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to initiate forward direction
high speed sound search of current
song.
3. Button (iPod
®
)
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of Title, Artist,
Album, Normal Display.
(Displays no information if the file has no
song information.)
4. Button
Press the button to play the
select song.
5. Button (REPEAT)
Repeats the song currently played.
6. Button (RANDOM)
• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds to shuffle order of all songs in
current category. (Song Random)
• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to shuffle order of albums in cur-
rent category. (Album Random)
• To cancel RANDOM Play, press this
button again.
7. CATEGORY Button
Moves to the upper category from cur-
rently played category of the iPod
®
.
To move to (play) the category (song)
displayed, press , but-
ton.
You will be able to search through the
lower category of the selected category.
FOLDER
FOLDER
2
RDM
1
RPT
OK
OK
INFO
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
TRACK
MEDIA
AC110HG_CDP_BT
AC110HG_CDP_BT
AC110HG_CDP_BT
Features of your vehicle
1424
✽
NOTICE FOR USING THE
iPod
®
DEVICE
• Some iPod
®
models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played.
Supported iPod
®
models:
- iPod
®
Mini
- iPod
®
4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic) gen-
eration
- iPod
®
Nano 1st~4th generation
- iPod
®
Touch 1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod
®
can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod
®
disabled due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod
®
. (Reset:
Refer to iPod
®
manual)
• An iPod
®
may not operate normally
on low battery.
• Some iPod
®
devices, such as the
iPhone, can be connected through the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology inter-
face. The device must have audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology capa-
bility (such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology). The
device can play, but it will not be con-
trolled by the audio system.
CAUTION IN USING THE
iPod
®
DEVICE
• The Hyundai iPod
®
Power Cable is
needed in order to operate iPod
®
with the audio buttons on the
audio system. The USB cable pro-
vided by Apple may cause mal-
function and should not be used
for Hyundai vehicles.
❋
The Hyundai iPod
®
Power Cable
may be purchased through your
Hyundai Dealership.
• When connecting iPod
®
with the
iPod
®
Power Cable, insert the con-
nector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted com-
pletely, communications between
iPod
®
and audio may be interrupt-
ed.
• When adjusting the sound effects of
the iPod
®
and the audio system, the
sound effects of both devices will
overlap and might reduce or distort
the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod
®
when adjust-
ing the audio system’s volume,
and turn off the equalizer of the
audio system when using the
equalizer of an iPod
®
.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the iPod
®
cable is connect-
ed, the system can be switched to
AUX mode even without iPod
®
device and may cause noise.
Disconnect the iPod
®
cable when
you are not using the iPod
®
device.
• When not using iPod
®
with car
audio, detach the iPod
®
cable from
iPod. Otherwise, iPod
®
may remain
in accessory mode, and may not
work properly.
• Detachable USB/AUX
❋
When connecting
the iPod
®
, use the
USB/AUX terminals.
❋
When disconnect-
ing the iPod
®
, dis-
connect both the
USB/AUX terminal.
• All-in-one USB/AUX
❋
The iPod
®
exclusive
cable must be con-
nected to both the
USB/AUX terminals
for iPod
®
charging
and operations to
be supported.
4143
Features of your vehicle
BLUETOOTH
®
WIRELESS
TECHNOLOGY PHONE OPERA-
TION (IF EQUIPPED)
1. button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2. button : Mute the microphone
during a call.
3. button : Places and transfers
calls.
4. button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
■
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is a wire-
less technology that allows multiple
devices to be connected in a short range,
low-powered devices like hands-free,
stereo headset, wireless remote control,
etc. For more information, visit the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology website
at
www.Bluetooth.com
■
General Features
• This audio system supports
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free and
stereo-headset features.
- HANDS-FREE feature: Making or
receiving calls wirelessly.
- STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing
music from cellular phones (that sup-
ports A2DP feature) wirelessly.
✽
NOTICE
• The phone must be paired to the sys-
tem before using Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology features.
• Only one selected (connected) cellular
phone can be used with the system at
a time.
• Some phones are not fully compatible
with this system.
■
Phone Setup
All
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology-relat-
ed operations can be performed in
PHONE menu.
1) Push the button to enter
SETUP mode.
2) Select “PHONE” item by using
, button, then push
the button.
3) Select desired item by using
, button, then push
the button.
OK
TUNEFILE
OK
TUNEFILE
SETUP
MUTE
VOLUME
4
3
1
2
Features of your vehicle
1444
• Pairing a phone
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology features, the phone must be
paired (registered) with the audio sys-
tem. Up to 5 phones can be paired with
the system.
NOTE:
• The pairing procedure of the phone
varies according to each phone
model. Before attempting to pair
phone, please see your phone’s
User’s Guide for instructions.
• Once pairing with the phone is com-
pleted, there is no need to pair with
that phone again unless the phone
is deleted manually from the audio
system (refer “Deleting a Phone”
section) or the vehicle’s information
is removed from the phone.
1. Press button to enter SETUP
mode.
2. Select “Phone”, then “Pair” in PHONE
menu.
3. The audio displays “searching
----
passkey: 0000”
4. Search the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology system on your phone.
Your phone should display your [vehi-
cle model name] on the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device list. Then
attempt pairing on your phone.
NOTE:
If the phone is paired to two or more
vehicles of the same model, i.e. both
vehicles are HYUNDAI
AZERA/GRANDEUR, some phones
may not handle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices of that name cor-
rectly. In this case, you may need to
change the name displayed on your
phone from AZERA/ GRANDEUR to
AZERA1/GRANDEUR1 and
AZERA2/GRANDEUR2.
Refer to your phone’s User’s Guide, or
contact your cellular carrier or phone
manufacturer for instructions.
• Connecting a phone
When the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology system is enabled, the
phone previously used is automatically
selected and re-connected. If you want to
select different phone previously paired,
the phone can be selected through
“Select Phone” menu.
Only a selected phone can be used with
the hands-free system at a time.
1. Press button to enter SETUP
mode.
2. Select “Phone”, then “Select” in
PHONE menu.
3. Select desired phone name from the
list shown.
• Deleting a Phone
The paired phone can be deleted.
- When the phone is deleted, all the infor-
mation associated with that phone is
also deleted (including phonebook).
- If you want to use the deleted phone
with the audio system again, pairing
procedure must be completed once
more.
1. Press button to enter SETUP
mode.
2. Select “Phone”, then “Delete” in
PHONE menu.
3. Select desired phone name from the
list shown.
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
4145
Features of your vehicle
• Changing Priority
If several phones are paired with the
audio system, the system attempts to
connect following order when the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system
is enabled:
1) “Priority” checked phone.
2) Previously connected phone
3) Gives up auto connection.
1. Press button to enter SETUP
mode.
2. Select “Phone”, then “Priority” in
PHONE menu.
3. Select desired phone name from the
list shown.
• Turning
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology ON/OFF
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Wireless
Technology system can be enabled (ON)
or disabled (OFF) by this menu.
- If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is
disabled, all the commands related to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system
prompts whether you wish to turn
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology ON or
not.
1. Press button to enter SETUP
mode.
2. Select “Phone”, then “BT Off” in
PHONE menu.
■
Receiving a Phone Call
When receiving a phone call, a ringtone
is audible from speakers and the audio
system changes into telephone mode.
When receiving a phone call, “Incoming”
message and incoming phone number (if
available) are displayed on the audio.
• To Answer a Call:
- Press button on the steering
wheel.
• To Reject a Call:
- Press button on the steering
wheel.
• To Adjust Ring Volume:
- Use VOLUME buttons on the steering
wheel.
• To Transfer a Call to the Phone (Private
Call):
- Press and hold button on the
steering wheel until the audio system
transfers a call to the phone.
■
Talking on the Phone
When talking on the phone, “Active Calls”
message and the other party’s phone
number (if available) are displayed on the
audio.
• To Mute the Microphone
- Press button on the steering
wheel.
• To Finish a Call
- Press button on the steering
wheel.
■
Making a Phone Call
A Call Back can be made by pressing
button on the steering wheel.
- This is the same function as using the
button solely on the cellular
phone.
NOTE:
Some phone models require pressing
button twice to make a call.
MUTE
SETUP
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
1464
✽
NOTICE
In the following situations, you or the
other party may have difficulty hearing
each other:
1. Speaking at the same time, your voice
may not reach each other parties.
(This is not a malfunction.) Speak
alternately with the other party on the
phone.
2. Keep the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology volume to a low level.
High-level volume may result in dis-
tortion and echo.
3. When driving on a rough road.
4. When driving at high speeds.
5. When the window is open.
6. When the air conditioning vents are
facing the microphone.
7. When the sound of the air condition-
ing fan is loud.
■
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Music Streaming
This audio system supports A2DP (Audio
Advanced Distribution Profile) and
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
Profile).
Both profiles are available for listening to
the MP3 music via
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology cellular phone supporting
above
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
profiles.
To play MP3 music from the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology cellular phone,
press the button until “MP3
Play” is displayed on the LCD.
Then try playing music by phone.
When playing music from the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology cellular phone, the
head unit displays MP3 MODE.
NOTE:
• Not only MP3 files, all the sounds
that the phone supports can be
heard by the audio system.
• The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
cellular phones shall feature A2DP
and AVRCP functions.
• Some A2DP and AVRCP
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology cellular
phones may not play music through
the head unit on first try. Please try
the below;
i.e : Menu
➟
Filemanager
➟
Music
➟
Option
➟
Play via Bluetooth
• Please refer to User's Guide of your
phone for more.
To stop music, try stop playing
music from the phone then change
the audio mode to other than “MP3
Play” mode (e.g. FM, AM, CD, etc.)
MEDIA
4147
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING
BLUETOOTH
®
WIRELESS
TECHNOLOGY CELLU-
LAR PHONE
• Do not use a cellular phone or
perform Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology settings (e.g. pairing
a phone) while driving.
• Some Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology-enabled phones may
not be recognized by the system
or fully compatible with the sys-
tem.
• Before using Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features of
the audio system, refer your
phone’s User’s Manual for phone-
side Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology operations.
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related fea-
tures.
• You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of
the cellular service area (e.g. in a
tunnel, in a underground, in a
mountainous area, etc.).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is
too loud, it may be difficult to hear
the other person’s voice during a
call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology system or
cellular service stations can be
disturbed.
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology your phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology-related operations.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to audio
system. In this case, store the
device in a different location may
resolve the situation.
• Please save your phone name in
English, or your phone name may
not be displayed correctly.
5
Before driving / 5-3
Key / 5-4
Engine Start/Stop button / 5-7
Automatic transaxle / 5-12
Brake system / 5-18
Cruise control system / 5-36
Smart cruise control system / 5-40
Economical operation / 5-53
Special driving conditions / 5-55
Winter driving / 5-59
Vehicle weight / 5-63
Trailer towing / 5-64
Driving your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
25
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-
dows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-
tion.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the
exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are
kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
53
Driving your vehicle
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in sec-
tion 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children, before putting a
car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control, that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death. The dri-
ver’s primary responsibility is in
the safe and legal operation of a
vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehi-
cle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle
or which are not permissible by law
should never be used during oper-
ation of the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
45
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the ON position. The light will go
off immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed.
OTF050001
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Keep all things in the vehicle
safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be care-
ful when operating what may dis-
turb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment. Driving
while under the influence of drugs
is as dangerous or more dangerous
than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
KEY
55
Driving your vehicle
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-
trical accessories are operative.
✽
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent the bat-
tery from discharging.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The engine
will crank until you release the key; then
it returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
OTF050002
WARNING - Ignition
switch
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column lock
is not a substitute for the parking
brake. Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in P (Park), set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition switch,
or any other controls through the
steering wheel while the vehicle is
in motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily injury
or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an acci-
dent.
Driving your vehicle
65
Starting the engine
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then release
the key.
It should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
4. Do not wait for the engine to warm up
while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and decel-
erating should be avoided.)
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedal.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed. The
vehicle can move and lead to an
accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is nor-
mal. The vehicle may suddenly
move if the brake pedal is
released when the rpm is high.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION
• Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start, wait
5 to 10 seconds before re-engag-
ing the starter. Improper use of
the starter may damage it.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the
engine running. It may damage
the starter.
57
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP
button
Whenever the front door is opened, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will illumi-
nate for your convenience. The light will
go off after about 30 seconds when the
door is closed. It will also go off immedi-
ately when the theft-alarm system is
armed.
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-
tion) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the ENGINE START/STOP button
with the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-
tion. When you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will not
change to the OFF position but to the
ACC position.
Vehicles equipped with anti-theft steering
column lock
The steering wheel locks when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is in the
OFF position to protect you against theft.
It locks when the door is opened.
If the steering wheel is not locked prop-
erly when you open the driver's door, the
warning chime will sound. Try locking the
steering wheel again. If the problem is
not solved, have it checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
In addition, if the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the OFF position after the dri-
ver's door is opened, the steering wheel
will not lock and the warning chime will
sound. In such a situation, close the door.
Then the steering wheel will lock and the
warning chime will stop.
✽
NOTICE
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock
properly, the ENGINE START/STOP
button will not work. Press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while turning the
steering wheel right and left to release
the tension.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
OHG050004
White
Driving your vehicle
85
ACC(Accessory)
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
while it is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks (if equipped
with anti-theft steering column lock) and
electrical accessories are operational.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the ACC position for more than 1 hour,
the button turns off automatically to pre-
vent battery discharge.
ON
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
while it is in the ACC position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not leave
the ENGINE START/STOP button in the
ON position for a long time. The battery
may discharge, because the engine is
not running.
Orange
Blue
CAUTION
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power
(ON), only when the vehicle is not in
motion. In an emergency situation
while the vehicle is in motion, you
are able to turn the engine off and
to the ACC position by pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button for
more than 2 seconds or 3 times
successively within 3 seconds. If
the vehicle is still moving, you can
restart the engine without depress-
ing the brake pedal by pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button with
the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
59
Driving your vehicle
START/RUN
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the shift lever in the P
(Park) or the N (Neutral) position. For
your safety, start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
✽
NOTICE
If you press the ENGINE START/STOP
button without depressing the brake
pedal for automatic transaxle vehicles,
the engine will not start and the ENGINE
START/STOP button changes as follow:
OFF
➔
ACC
➔
ON
➔
OFF or ACC
✽
NOTICE
If you leave the ENGINE START/ STOP
button in the ACC or ON position for a
long time, the battery will discharge.
WARNING
• Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion. This would
result in loss of directional con-
trol and braking function, which
could cause an accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock (if equipped) is not a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Before
leaving the driver's seat, always
make sure the shift lever is
engaged in P (Park), set the park-
ing brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never reach for the ENGINE
START/STOP button or any other
controls through the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in the area could
cause loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily
injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver's seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an
accident.
Not illuminated
Driving your vehicle
105
Starting the engine
✽
NOTICE - Kick down mecha-
nism (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a kick
down mechanism in the accelerator
pedal, it prevents you from driving at
full throttle unintentionally by making
the driver require increased effort to
depress the accelerator pedal. However,
if you depress the pedal more than
approximately 80%, the vehicle can be
at full throttle and the accelerator pedal
will be easier to depress. This is not a
malfunction but a normal condition.
1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
3. Place the shift lever in the P (Park)
position.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the ENGINE START/STOP but-
ton.
It should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
6. Do not wait for the engine to warm up
while the vehicle remains stationary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and decel-
erating should be avoided.)
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, etc.) may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedal.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed. The
vehicle can move and lead to an
accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is nor-
mal. The vehicle may suddenly
move if the brake pedal is
released when the rpm is high.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button in an
attempt to restart the engine.
511
Driving your vehicle
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP but-
ton is in the ACC position or above, if
any door is opened, the system checks
for the smart key. If the smart key is not
in the vehicle, the warning "Key is not
in vehicle" will illuminate on the LCD
display. And if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for 5 seconds. The
warning will turn off while the vehicle is
moving. Always have the smart key
with you.
✽
NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button directly with the
smart key.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you
can not start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
you are not able to replace the fuse,
you can start the engine by pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button
for 10 seconds with the ENGINE
START/STOP button in the ACC
position. The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal. But for
your safety always depress the brake
pedal before starting the engine.
WARNING
The engine will start by pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button, only
when the smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any person
who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the ENGINE START/STOP but-
ton or related parts.
OHG050009
CAUTION
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 5 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp
fuse is disconnected.
Driving your vehicle
125
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 forward
speeds and one reverse speed. The indi-
vidual speeds are selected automatically,
depending on the position of the shift
lever.
✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
OHG050012L
+
+
(
(
U
U
P
P
)
)
-
-
(
(
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
)
)
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
Lock release
button
513
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster
displays the shift lever position when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the drive
wheels from rotating.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a car into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery
roads. The vehicle may slip caus-
ing an accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an incline, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the serv-
ice brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
Driving your vehicle
145
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator pedal fully (more than 80%)
until the kick down mechanism works
with a clicking noise, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
✽
NOTICE
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
• A clicking noise heard from the kick
down mechanism by depressing the
accelerator pedal fully is a normal
condition.
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except as explained in
“Rocking the vehicle” in this sec-
tion.
OHG050014
+
+
(
(
U
U
P
P
)
)
-
-
(
(
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
)
)
S
S
p
p
o
o
r
r
t
t
s
s
m
m
o
o
d
d
e
e
WARNING
Do not drive with the shift lever in N
(Neutral).
The engine brake will not work and
lead to an accident.
515
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-
ated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving on
a slippery road. Push the shift lever to
the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st
gear.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle from P (Park) into R
(Reverse) unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) into R
(Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)
position with the brake pedal depressed,
continue depressing the brake, then do
the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering
the shift-lock override access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the access
hole and press down on the screwdriv-
er.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer immedi-
ately.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the car.
OHG053082L
Driving your vehicle
165
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-
tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into R
(Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the car from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
517
Driving your vehicle
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
Driving your vehicle
185
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would. The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when neces-
sary to maintain steering control on slip-
pery surfaces.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-
cle’s ability to safely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator
and brake pedal before driving,
you may depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
519
Driving your vehicle
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
Foot parking brake
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then depress the park-
ing brake pedal down as far as possible.
In addition it is recommended that when
parking the vehicle on an incline, the shift
lever should be in the P (Park) position
on automatic transaxle vehicles.
WARNING
- Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
OHG051085
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
Driving your vehicle
205
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, depress
the parking brake pedal a second time
while applying the foot brake. The pedal
will automatically extend to the fully
released position.
If the parking brake does not release or
does not release all the way, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OHG051084
CAUTION
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation. It could
damage the vehicle system and
make endanger driving safety.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the shift
lever is securely positioned in P
(Park).
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
521
Driving your vehicle
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated
when the parking brake is applied with
the ignition switch in the START or ON
position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released while
engine is running, there may be a mal-
function in the brake system. Immediate
attention is necessary. If at all possible,
cease driving the vehicle immediately. If
that is not possible, use extreme caution
while operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you can
reach a safe location or repair shop.
Electric parking brake (EPB)
(if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (electric parking
brake):
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes on.
Also, the EPB is applied automatically if
the Auto Hold button is on when the
engine is turned off. However, if you
press the EPB switch approximately
within 3 seconds after the engine is
turned off, the EPB will not be applied.
W-75
OHG050015
CAUTION
Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation. It could
damage the vehicle system and
endanger driving safety.
Driving your vehicle
225
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electric parking
brake), press the EPB switch in the fol-
lowing condition:
• Have the ignition switch or ENGINE
START/STOP button in the ON posi-
tion.
• Depress the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal
Make sure the brake warning light goes
off.
To release EPB (electric parking brake)
automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress the
brake pedal and shift out of P (Park) to
R (Rear), N (Neutral) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress the
brake pedal and shift out of N (Neutral)
to R (Rear) or D (Drive).
• Depress the brake pedal satisfying the
following conditions.
1. Engine running
2. Driver's seat belt fastened
3. Driver's door, engine hood and trunk
closed
4. Shift lever in R (Rear), D (Drive) or
Sports mode
Make sure the brake warning light goes
off.
✽
NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage the
EPB even though the ignition switch
or ENGINE STOP/START button is
in the OFF position, but you cannot
release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking brake
manually with the EPB switch when
you drive downhill or when backing up
the vehicle.
OHG050016
CAUTION
• If the parking brake warning light
is still on even though the EPB
has been released, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with the
EPB applied. It may cause exces-
sive brake pad and brake rotor
wear.
523
Driving your vehicle
EPB (electric parking brake) may be
automatically applied when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
• The engine is turned off with the EPB
applied
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB applied,
but doesn't release automatically, a
warning will sound and a message will
appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
and the engine hood or trunk is
opened, a warning will sound and a
message will appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehicle, a
warning may sound and a message
may appear.
If the above situation occurs, depress the
brake pedal and release EPB by pressing
the EPB switch.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the shift
lever in place of the parking
brake. Set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is
securely positioned in P (Park).
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestri-
ans.
OHG051020L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
245
When the conversion from Auto Hold to
EPB is not working properly a warning
will sound and a message will appear.
If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold is
activated because of ESP(electronic sta-
bility program) signal, a warning will
sound and a message will appear.
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal when the
above message appears for the Auto
Hold and EPB may not activate.
CAUTION
• A click sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB,
but these conditions are normal
and indicate that the EPB is func-
tioning properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet,
make sure to inform him/her how
to operate the EPB.
• The EPB may malfunction if you
drive with the EPB applied.
• When you automatically release
EPB by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal, depress it slowly.
OHG051018L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OHG051021L
■ Type A
■ Type B
525
Driving your vehicle
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is turned to the
ON position and goes off in approximate-
ly 3 seconds if the system is operation
normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator remains
on, comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch or the
engine start/stop button is turned to the
ON position, this indicates that the EPB
may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
The EPB malfunction indicator may illu-
minate when the ESP indicator comes on
to indicate that the ESP is not working
properly, but it does not indicate a mal-
function of the EPB.
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake pedal
while driving, emergency braking is pos-
sible by pulling up and holding the EPB
switch. Braking is possible only while you
are holding the EPB switch.
✽
NOTICE
During emergency braking by the EPB,
the parking brake warning light will
illuminate to indicate that the system is
operating.
WARNING
Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation.
OHG050060
■ Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION
• The EPB warning light may illumi-
nate if the EPB switch operates
abnormally. Shut the engine off
and turn it on again after a few
minutes. The warning light will go
off and the EPB switch will oper-
ate normally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the parking brake warning light
does not illuminate or blinks even
though the EPB switch was pulled
up, the EPB is not applied.
• If the parking brake warning light
blinks when the EPB warning light
is on, press the switch, then pull it
up. Once more press it back to its
original position and pull it back
up. If the EPB warning does not
go off, have the system checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If you continuously notice a noise
or burning smell when the EPB is
used for emergency braking, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Driving your vehicle
265
When the EPB (electric parking
brake) is not released
If the EPB does not release normally,
take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer by loading the vehicle
on a flatbed tow truck and have the sys-
tem checked.
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle in a
standstill even though the brake pedal is
not depressed after the driver brings the
vehicle to a complete stop by depressing
the brake pedal.
Set up
1. With the driver's door, engine hood
and trunk closed, fasten the driver's
seat belt or depress the brake pedal
and then press the Auto Hold button.
The white AUTO HOLD indicator will
come on and the system will be in the
standby position.
OHG050023
OHG050024
OHG050022
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
527
Driving your vehicle
2. When you stop the vehicle completely
by depressing the brake pedal, the
AUTO HOLD indicator changes from
white to green.
3. The vehicle will remain stationary even
if you release the brake pedal.
4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
Leaving
If you press the accelerator pedal with
the shift lever in R (Reverse), D (Drive) or
sports mode, the Auto Hold will be
released automatically and the vehicle
will start to move. The indicator changes
from green to white.
Cancel
To cancel the Auto Hold operation, press
the Auto Hold switch while depressing
the brake pedal. The AUTO HOLD indi-
cator will go out.
If you want to release it manually, pull the
EPB switch while depressing the brake
pedal. The AUTO HOLD indicator
changes from green to white and the sys-
tem changes to the standby position.
For your safety, release the Auto Hold
operation manually if the vehicle ahead is
too close or during downhill driving.
✽
NOTICE
• The Auto Hold does not operate
when:
- The driver's seat belt is unfastened
and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The trunk is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold auto-
matically switches to EPB in such
cases:
- The driver's seat belt is unfastened
and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The trunk is opened
- The vehicle is in a standstill for more
than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a steep
slope for a long period of time
- The vehicle moved several times
In these cases, the brake warning light
comes on, the AUTO HOLD indicator
changes from green to white, and a
warning sounds and a message will
appear to inform you that EPB has
been automatically engaged. Before
driving off again, press foot brake
pedal, check the surrounding area
near your vehicle and release parking
brake manually with the EPB switch.
(Continued)
OHG050027
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING
When driving off from Auto Hold by
depressing the accelerator pedal,
always check the surrounding area
near your vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth launch.
Driving your vehicle
285
(Continued)
• If the AUTO HOLD indicator lights
up yellow, the Auto Hold is not work-
ing properly. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
• While operating Auto Hold, you may
hear mechanical noise. However, it is
normal operating noise.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
(if equipped)
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-
lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situa-
tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-
trol the force being delivered to the
brakes.
WARNING
ABS (or ESP) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or danger-
ous driving maneuvers. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for cars
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (or Electronic Stability
Program system) may be longer
than for those without it in the fol-
lowing road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tire chains installed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESP) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
WARNING
• Press the accelerator pedal slow-
ly when you start the vehicle.
• For your safety, cancel the Auto
Hold when you drive downhill or
back up the vehicle or park the
vehicle.
CAUTION
If there is a malfunction with the dri-
ver’s door, hood or trunk open
detection system, the Auto Hold
may not work properly.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
529
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your car
over to a safe place and stop the
engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with the ABS. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev-
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Driving your vehicle
305
Electronic stability program (ESP)
(if equipped)
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
system is designed to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering maneuvers. ESP checks
where you are steering and where the
vehicle is actually going.
ESP applies the brakes at individual
wheels and intervenes in the engine
management system to stabilize the
vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESP will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESP is active.
✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) System is functioning
properly.
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cor-
nering. Electronic stability program
(ESP) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in seri-
ous accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent acci-
dents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESP installed, always fol-
low all the normal precautions for
driving - including driving at safe
speeds for the conditions.
OHG050028
OHGC052028
OHG050083L
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type C
531
Driving your vehicle
ESP operation
ESP ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESP and ESP OFF indi-
cator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESP is turned on.
• Press the ESP OFF button
after turning the ignition ON
to turn ESP off. (ESP OFF
indicator will illuminate). To
turn the ESP on, press the
ESP OFF button (ESP OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESP per-
forming an automatic system
self-check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESP is in operation,
ESP indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Program is operating proper-
ly, you can feel a slight pulsa-
tion in the vehicle. This is only
the effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, the engine
rpm (revolution per minute)
may not be increased even if
you press the accelerator
pedal deeply. This is to main-
tain the stability and traction
of the vehicle and does not
indicate a problem.
ESP operation off
ESP OFF state
• To cancel ESP operation,
press the ESP OFF button
(ESP OFF indicator light illu-
minates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESP
is off, ESP remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESP will automatically turn on
again.
-
Driving your vehicle
325
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
the ESP system is operating normally.
The ESP indicator light blinks whenever
ESP is operating or illuminates when
ESP fails to operate.
ESP OFF indicator light comes on when
the ESP is turned off with the button.
ESP OFF usage
When driving
• ESP should be turned on for daily driv-
ing whenever possible.
• To turn ESP off while driving, press the
ESP OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
Never press the ESP OFF button while
ESP is operating (ESP indicator light
blinks).
If ESP is turned off while ESP is operat-
ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.
✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESP is
turned off (ESP OFF light illuminat-
ed).
• Turning the ESP off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESP system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Program
system is only a driving aid; use
precautions for safe driving by
slowing down on curved, snowy, or
icy roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESP indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
■ ESP indicator light
■ ESP OFF indicator light
533
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further enhance-
ments to vehicle stability and steering
responses when a vehicle is driven on a
slippery road or a vehicle detects
changes in coefficient of friction between
right wheels and left wheels when brak-
ing.
VSM operation
When the VSM is operating, the steering
wheel may be controlled.
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient
or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESP OFF indicator light ( ) remains
illuminated on the instrument cluster
• EPS (Electric Power Steering) indica-
tor light remains illuminated on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESP OFF button to turn
off the ESP, the VSM will also cancel and
the ESP OFF indicator light ( ) illumi-
nates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESP OFF indicator light goes
out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by press-
ing the ESP OFF button. It indicates that
a malfunction has been detected some-
where in the EPS (Electric Power
Steering) system or VSM system. If the
ESP indicator light ( ) or EPS warning
light remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked.
✽
NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9 mph)
on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (18
mph) when a vehicle is braking on a
split-mu road. The split-mu road is
made of surfaces which have different
friction forces.
WARNING
Never press the ESP OFF button
while ESP is operating.
If the ESP is turned off while ESP is
operating, the vehicle may go out of
control.
To turn ESP off while driving, press
the ESP OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
Driving your vehicle
345
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to slip back
on a steep hill when it starts to go after
stopping. The Hill-start Assist Control
(HAC) prevents the vehicle from slipping
back by operating the brakes automati-
cally for about 2 seconds. The brakes are
released when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
✽
NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when the
transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the
ESP is off but it does not activate
when the ESP has malfunctioned.
Good braking practices
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for about
2 seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices but a sup-
plementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Always hold the steering wheel
firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to acti-
vate according to the driver’s
intention, even with the VSM
installed. Always follow all the
normal precautions for driving at
safe speeds for the conditions –
including driving in inclement
weather and on a slippery road.
• Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSM system
to malfunction. When replacing
tires, make sure they are the
same size as your original tires.
WARNING
• Whenever you leave or park your
vehicle, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transaxle
into the P (Park) position. If the
parking brake is not fully
engaged, the vehicle may move
inadvertently and injure yourself
and others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestri-
ans.
535
Driving your vehicle
• Check to be sure the parking brake is
not engaged and that the parking
brake indicator light is out before driv-
ing away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the car is washed. Wet brakes
can be dangerous! Your car will not
stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.
Wet brakes may cause the car to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the car
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and call
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
• Do not coast down hills with the car out
of gear. This is extremely hazardous.
Keep the car in gear at all times, use
the brakes to slow down, then shift to a
lower gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Do not "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driv-
ing can be dangerous because the
brakes might overheat and lose their
effectiveness. It also increases the
wear of the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
car pointed straight ahead while you
slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your car is equipped with an auto-
matic transaxle, don't let your car
creep forward. To avoid creeping for-
ward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the car is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (Park). If your
car is facing downhill, turn the front
wheels into the curb to help keep the
car from rolling. If your car is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the curb to help keep the car from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep
the car from rolling, block the wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi-
tion. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the shift lever
in P (Park) and block the rear wheels
so the car cannot roll. Then release the
parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
Driving your vehicle
365
➀ Cruise indicator
➁ SET indicator
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without pressing the acceler-
ator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
✽
NOTICE
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activated
or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress the
brake pedal at least once after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position
or starting the engine. This is to check
if the brake switch which is important
part to cancel cruise control is in nor-
mal condition.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated)
the cruise control can be activat-
ed unintentionally. Keep the
cruise control system off (cruise
indicator light OFF) when the
cruise control is not in use, to
avoid inadvertently setting a
speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the car at a constant speed, for
instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
• Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,
which may increase vehicle speed.
OHG050032
OHG051032L
■ Type A
■ Type B
537
Driving your vehicle
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the cruise ON-OFF button on the
steering wheel to turn the system on.
The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 40 km/h (25 mph).
3. Push the SET- switch, and release it at
the desired speed. The SET indicator
light in the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate. Release the accelerator pedal.The
desired speed will automatically be
maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES+ switch and hold it. Your
vehicle will accelerate. Release the
switch at the speed you want.
• Push the RES+ switch and release it
immediately. The cruising speed will
increase by 1.0 km/h each time the
RES+ switch is operated in this man-
ner.
OHG050035 OHG050034OHG050033
Driving your vehicle
385
To decrease cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the SET- switch and hold it. Your
vehicle will gradually slow down.
Release the switch at the speed you
want to maintain.
• Push the SET- switch and release it
immediately. The cruising speed will
decrease by 1.0 km/h each time the
SET- switch is operated in this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
If you press the SET- switch at increased
speed, the cruising speed will be set
again.
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Press the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic
transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch located on
the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 15 km/h (9
mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
OHG050036OHG050035
539
Driving your vehicle
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the SET indicator light
in the instrument cluster will go off), but it
will not turn the system off. If you wish to
resume cruise control operation, push
the RES+ switch located on your steering
wheel. You will return to your previously
preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 40 km/h
(25 mph):
If any method other than the cruise
ON/OFF switch was used to cancel cruis-
ing speed and the system is still activat-
ed, the most recent set speed will auto-
matically resume when the RES+ switch
is pushed.
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
40 km/h(25 mph).
✽
NOTICE
Always check the road conditions when
pressing the RES+ switch to resume the
speed.
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Push the cruise ON/OFF button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise con-
trol operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To set cruise control speed”
on the previous page.
OHG050034 OHG050033
Driving your vehicle
405
➀ Cruise indicator
➁ SET indicator
➂ Set speed
➃ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The smart cruise control system allows
you to program the vehicle to maintain
constant speed and distance detecting
the vehicle ahead without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the smart cruise control is left
on, (cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated)
the smart cruise control can be
activated unintentionally. Keep
the smart cruise control system
off (cruise indicator light off)
when the smart cruise control is
not used.
• Use the smart cruise control sys-
tem only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the smart cruise con-
trol when it may not be safe to
keep the car at a constant speed.
For instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or steep hills.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the smart cruise control
system.
• The smart cruise control system
is not a substitute for safe driving.
It is the responsibility of the driv-
er to always check the speed and
distance of the vehicle ahead.
WARNING
For your safety, please read the
owner's manual before using the
smart cruise control system.
OHG050052
OHG051052L
■ Type A
■ Type B
541
Driving your vehicle
Smart cruise control speed
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the cruise ON-OFF button on the
steering wheel to turn the system on.
The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
The smart cruise control speed can be
set as follows:
• 30 km/h (18.6 mph) ~ 180 km/h (113
mph): when there is no vehicle in
front
• 0 km/h (0 mph) ~ 180 km/h (113
mph): when there is a vehicle in front
3. Push the SET- switch, and release it at
the desired speed. The SET indicator
light, set speed and vehicle to vehicle
distance on the LCD screen will illumi-
nate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal. The
desired speed will automatically be
maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES
+
switch and hold it. Your
vehicle set speed will increase by 10
km/h. Release the switch at the speed
you want.
• Push the RES
+
switch and release it
immediately. The cruising speed will
increase by 1.0 km/h each time the
RES
+
switch is operated in this man-
ner.
• You can set the speed to 180 km/h
(113 mph).
OHG052054KOHG052053K OHG052055K
Driving your vehicle
425
To decrease the crusie control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the SET- switch and hold it. Your
vehicle set speed will decrease by 10
km/h. Release the switch at the speed
you want.
• Push the SET- switch and release it
immediately. The cruising speed will
decrease by 1.0 km/h each time the
SET- switch is operated in this manner.
• You can set the speed to 30 km/h (18.6
mph).
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
If you press the SET- switch the
increased cruising speed will return to it’s
set speed.
✽
NOTICE
Be careful when accelerating temporar-
ily, because the speed is not controlled
automatically at this time even if there is
a vehicle in front of you.
Smart Cruise control will be tem-
porarily canceled when:
Cancelled manually
• The brake pedal is depressed.
• The shift lever is shifted to N (Neutral),
R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
OHG052054K OHG052056K
543
Driving your vehicle
Cancelled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The EPB (electronic parking brake) is
applied.
• The vehicle speed is over 180km/h
(113mph)
• The vehicle stops on a steep incline.
• The ESP or ABS is operating.
• The ESP is turned off.
• The sensor or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter.
• The vehicle stops and go repeatedly for
a long period of time.
• The driver starts driving by depressing
the accelerator pedal or pushing the
RES+ switch if a vehicle stops far away
ahead of the your vehicle.
• The accelerator pedal is continuously
depressed for more than 1 minute.
Each of these actions will cancel the
smart cruise control operation. (The
SET indicator, set speed and vehicle to
vehicle distance on the LCD display
will go off.)
In a condition the smart cruise control
is cancelled automatically, the smart
cruise control will not resume even
though the RES+ or SET- switch is
pushed. Also, the EPB (electronic
parking brake) will be applied.
If the system is cancelled, the warning
chime will sound and a message will
appear for a few seconds. You must
adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the
distance to the vehicle ahead by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal.
Always check the road conditions. Do not
rely on the warning chime.
OHG051080L
CAUTION
If the smart cruise control is can-
celled by other than the reasons
mentioned, have the system checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Driving your vehicle
445
To resume cruise control set
speed:
If any method other than the cruise
ON/OFF switch was used to cancel cruis-
ing speed and the system is still activat-
ed, the cruising speed will automatically
resume when the SET- or RES+ switch is
pushed.
If the RES+ switch is pushed, the speed
will resume to the recently set speed. It
will not resume if the vehicle speed has
dropped below approximately 30km/h
(18.6mph).
✽
NOTICE
Always check the road conditions when
pressing the RES+ switch to resume
speed.
To turn cruise control off:
Push the cruise ON/OFF button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the instrument
cluster will go off).
Smart cruise control vehicle to
vehicle distance
To set vehicle to vehicle distance:
This function allows you to program the
vehicle to maintain relative distance to
the vehicle ahead without depressing the
accelerator pedal or brake pedal.
OHG052053KOHG052055K
OHG050057
OHG052057K
■ Type A
■ Type B
545
Driving your vehicle
The vehicle to vehicle distance will auto-
matically activate when the smart cruise
control system is on.
Select the appropriate distance accord-
ing to road conditions and vehicle speed.
Each time the button is pressed, the vehi-
cle to vehicle distance changes as fol-
lows:
For example, if you drive at 90 km/h (56
mph), the distance maintain as follows;
Distance 4 - approximately 52 m
Distance 3 - approximately 40 m
Distance 2 - approximately 30 m
Distance 1 - approximately 25 m
✽
NOTICE
The 'Distance 4' is always set when the
system is used for the first time after
starting the engine.
■ Without brake applied ■ With brake applied
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
Distance 4 Distance 3
Distance 2 Distance 1
Distance 4 Distance 3
Distance 2 Distance 1
• The vehicle will maintain the set speed, when the lane ahead is clear.
• The vehicle will slow down or speed up to maintain the selected distance, when
there is a vehicle ahead of you in the lane. (A vehicle will appear in front of your
vehicle in the LCD display only when there is an actual vehicle in front of you)
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruising speed
after accelerating to the selected speed.
OHG050078/OHG050079
Driving your vehicle
465
In traffic situation
In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the vehi-
cle ahead of you stops. Also, if the vehi-
cle ahead of you starts moving, your
vehicle will start as well. However, if the
vehicle stops for more than 3 seconds,
you must depress the accelerator pedal
or push the RES+ switch to start driving.
CAUTION
• The warning chime sounds and
malfunction indicator blinks if it
is hard to maintain the selected
distance to the vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
actively adjust the vehicle speed,
as well as the distance to the
vehicle ahead by depressing the
accelerator or brake pedal.
• Even if the warning chime is not
activated, always pay attention to
the driving conditions to prevent
dangerous situations from occur-
ring.
CAUTION
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed:
less than 30 km/h (18.6 mph)) dis-
appears to the next lane, the warn-
ing chime will sound and a mes-
sage will appear. Adjust your vehi-
cle speed for vehicles or objects
that can suddenly appear in front of
you.
OHG051071L OHG051073L
547
Driving your vehicle
Distance to distance vehicle sen-
sor
The sensor detects the distance to the
vehicle ahead.
If the sensor is covered with dirt or other
foreign matter, the vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance control may not operate correctly.
Always keep the area in front of the sen-
sor clean.
Sensor malfunction indicator
If the sensor or cover is
dirty or obscured with for-
eign matter such as snow,
the indicator will illuminate.
Clean the sensor by using
a soft cloth.
SCC (Smart cruise control) malfunc-
tion indicator
The warning light illumi-
nates when the vehicle to
vehicle distance control
system is not functioning
normally.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er and have the system
checked.
OHG050059
CAUTION
• Do not install accessories around
the sensor and do not replace the
bumper by yourself. It may inter-
fere with the sensor performance.
• Always keep the sensor and
bumper clean.
• To prevent sensor cover damage
from occurring, wash the car with
a soft cloth.
• Do not damage the sensor or sen-
sor area by a strong impact. If the
sensor moves slightly off posi-
tion, the smart cruise control sys-
tem will not operate correctly.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
• Use only a genuine HYUNDAI
sensor cover for your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
485
To convert to cruise control mode:
The driver may choose to only use the
cruise control mode (speed control func-
tion) by doing as follows:
1. Turn the smart cruise control system
on (the cruise indicator light will be on
but the system will not be activated).
2. Push the distance to distance switch
for more than 2 seconds.
3. Choose between "Smart cruise con-
trol(SCC) mode" and "Cruise con-
trol(CC) mode".
Limitations of the system
The smart cruise control system may
have limits to its ability to detect distance
to the vehicle ahead due to road and traf-
fic conditions.
On curves
• On curves, the smart cruise control
system may not detect a moving vehi-
cle in your lane, and then your vehicle
could accelerate to the set speed. Also,
the vehicle speed will slow down when
the vehicle ahead is recognized sud-
denly.
• Select the appropriate set speed on
curves and apply the brakes or accel-
erator pedal if necessary.
• Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.
Apply the accelerator pedal and select
the appropriate set speed. Check to be
sure that the road conditions permit
safe operation of the smart cruise con-
trol.
WARNING
When using the cruise control
mode, you must manually access
the distance to other vehicles as
the system will not automatically
brake to slow down for other vehi-
cles.
OBH058030
OBH058029
549
Driving your vehicle
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving, the
smart cruise control system may not
detect a moving vehicle in your lane,
and cause your vehicle to accelerate to
the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed
will slow down when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed on
inclines and apply the brakes or accel-
erator pedal if necessary.
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your lane
from an adjacent lane cannot be rec-
ognized by the sensor until it is in the
sensor's detection range.
• The sensor may not detect immediate-
ly when a vehicle cuts in suddenly.
Always pay attention to the traffic, road
and driving conditions.
• If a vehicle which moves into your lane
is slower than your vehicle, your speed
may decrease to maintain the distance
to the vehicle ahead.
• If a vehicle which moves into your lane
is faster than your vehicle, your vehicle
will accelerate to the selected speed.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when a
vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the vehicle
ahead of you is not detected, drive with
caution.
OBH058053 OBH058045 OHG050074
Driving your vehicle
505
Vehicle recognition
Some vehicles ahead in your lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor as follows:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles or
bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-decel-
erating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile such as
trailers with no loads
A vehicle ahead cannot be recognized
correctly by the sensor if any of following
occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing upwards
due to overloading in the trunk
- While making turns by steering
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves
Apply the brakes or accelerator pedal if
necessary.
• When vehicles are at a standstill and
the vehicle in front of you changes to
the next lane, be careful when your
vehicle starts to move because it may
not recognize the stopped vehicle in
front of you.
OBH058046 OHG050075
551
Driving your vehicle
• Always look out for pedestrians when
your vehicle is maintaining a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
• Always be cautious for vehicles with
higher height or vehicles carrying
loads that sticks out to the back of the
vehicle.
OHG050076 OHG050077
WARNING
• The smart cruise control system
cannot guarantee the stop for
every emergency situation.
If an emergency stop is neces-
sary, you must apply the brakes.
• Keep a safe distance according
to road conditions and vehicle
speed. If the vehicle to vehicle
distance is too close during a
high-speed driving, a serious col-
lision may result.
• The smart cruise control system
cannot recognize a stopped vehi-
cle, pedestrians or an oncoming
vehicle. Always look ahead cau-
tiously to prevent unexpected
and sudden situations from
occurring.
• When other vehicles are chang-
ing lanes in front of you frequent-
ly, the smart cruise control sys-
tem may not operate appropriate-
ly. Always look ahead cautiously
to prevent unexpected and sud-
den situations from occurring.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
525
CAUTION
The smart cruise control system
may not operate temporarily due to
electrical interference.
(Continued)
• The smart cruise control system
is not a substitute for safe driving
practices but a convenience
function only. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always
check the speed and the distance
to the vehicle ahead.
• Always be aware of the selected
speed and vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance.
• Always maintain sufficient brak-
ing distance and decelerate your
vehicle by applying the brakes if
necessary.
• As the smart cruise control sys-
tem may not recognize complex
driving situations, always pay
attention to driving conditions
and control your vehicle speed.
• For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
553
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
kilometers (miles) you can get from a liter
(gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the fol-
lowing driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-
ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to that of the other traffic so you
don't have to change speeds unneces-
sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
possible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you can
avoid unnecessary braking. This also
reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your car uses.
Driving at a moderate speed, especial-
ly on the highway, is one of the most
effective ways to reduce fuel consump-
tion.
• Do not "ride" the brake pedal. This can
increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components.
In addition, driving with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal may cause the
brakes to overheat, which reduces
their effectiveness and may lead to
more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-
ment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your car in good condition. For
better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your car
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. If you drive your
car in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see section 7
for details).
• Keep your car clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the car. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel con-
sumption and also contribute to corro-
sion.
• Travel lightly. Do not carry unnecessary
weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel
economy.
• Do not let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Driving your vehicle
545
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-
ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Do not "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving very slowly in too
high a gear resulting in engine bucking.
If this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-
ed by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operat-
ed by engine power so your fuel econ-
omy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled
inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine run-
ning. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
555
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in braking or
steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light up-
and-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transaxle.
Do not race the engine, and spin the
wheels as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle
pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid
engine overheating and possible dam-
age to the transaxle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
1JBB3302
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slip-
pery surfaces.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle dam-
age or failure, and tire damage.
Driving your vehicle
565
✽
NOTICE
Vehicle equipped with the ESP system
should turn off the system prior to rock-
ing the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
OMC035004
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
OBH058035L
557
Driving your vehicle
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-
pared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking oper-
ation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
Driving your vehicle
585
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire fail-
ure.
✽
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may over-
heat the engine.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
Always check tires for proper
inflation before driving. For prop-
er tire pressures, refer to “Tires
and wheels” in section 8.
• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-
cient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tires can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tire tread before driving your
car. For further information and
tread limits, refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 7.
OMG015008
559
Driving your vehicle
Severe weather conditions in the winter
result in greater wear and other prob-
lems. To minimize winter driving problem,
you should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to
install tire chains on your tires. If snow
tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and han-
dling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake appli-
cations, and sharp turns are potentially
very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-
cations on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-
cient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all countries.
Check country laws before fitting tire
chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehi-
cle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-
imum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tires. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
1JBB3305
Driving your vehicle
605
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by mount-
ing some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-
ommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wire-
type chains with a thickness of less than
12 mm (0.47 in). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufactur-
ers warranty.
Install tire chains only on the front tires.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac-
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.5 to 1 km (0.3 to
0.6 miles) to ensure safe mount-
ing. Retighten or remount the
chains if they are loose.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if avail-
able. Always place the vehicle in P
(Park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
1JBA4068
561
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-
cates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the bat-
tery and cables as described in section
7. The level of charge in your battery can
be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or a service station.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and compo-
nents to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec-
ommended speed limit, whichev-
er is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
625
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the con-
tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-
ily while you put the shift lever in P (Park)
and block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and inter-
fere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the car to be sure the move-
ment of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weath-
er where you drive your car, you should
carry appropriate emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or chains,
flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel,
jumper cables, window scraper, gloves,
ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine compart-
ment
Placement of foreign objects or materials
which prevent cooling of the engine, in
the engine compartment, may cause a
failure or combustion. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the damage caused
by such placement.
563
Driving your vehicle
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, to keep your
loaded vehicle weight within its design
rating capability. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
the vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining
your vehicle's weight ratings, from the
vehicle's specifications and the certifica-
tion label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-
ment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rat-
ing)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-
tification label located on the driver’s (or
front passenger’s) door sill.
Overloading
VEHICLE WEIGHT
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-
cle are on the certification label
attached to the driver's (or front
passenger’s) door. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an acci-
dent or vehicle damage. You can
calculate the weight of your load by
weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
645
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
6
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-3
If the engine will not start / 6-4
Emergency starting / 6-5
If the engine overheats / 6-7
If you have a flat tire / 6-8
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-16
Towing / 6-21
Emergency commodity / 6-25
What to do in an emergency
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Press the flasher switch with the ignition
switch in any position. The flasher switch
is located in the center console switch
panel. All turn signal lights will flash
simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• The hazard waning flasher should
always be on while the vehicle is being
towed.
OHG040109
63
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-
cle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the car slow down while driving
straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes
immediately or attempt to pull off the
road as this may cause a loss of con-
trol. When the car has slowed to such
a speed that it is safe to do so, brake
carefully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and park on
firm, level ground. If you are on a divid-
ed highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the transaxle
in P (Park).
3.Have all passengers get out of the car.
Be sure they all get out on the side of
the car that is away from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this sec-
tion.
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
/OFF position, check all connectors at
the ignition coils and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be discon-
nected or loose.
3. If the engine still does not start, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the car to start it. This
could result in a collision or cause
other damage.
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent techni-
cian or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not fol-
lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sul-
furic acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
car.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start with
a low or frozen battery.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
1VQA4001
■ Engine compartment
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-
volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
jump start connector (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative ter-
minal of the booster battery (3), then
the other end to the negative terminal
of the jump start connector (4). Do not
connect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative ter-
minal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged bat-
tery to overheat and crack, releas-
ing battery acid.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
67
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you will experience a loss of
power, or hear loud pinging or knocking,
the engine is probably too hot. If this hap-
pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park) and set
the parking brake. If the air condition-
ing is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the car or steam is coming out from
the hood, stop the engine. Do not open
the hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has stopped.
If there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be sure
the engine cooling fan is operating. If
the fan is not running, turn the engine
off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check for
coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the car. (If the air con-
ditioning had been in use, it is normal
for cold water to be draining from it
when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for assistance.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine tem-
perature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If over-
heating happens again, call an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to blow out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
CAUTION
• Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling sys-
tem and this should be checked
as soon as possible by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly
adding engine coolant may cause
cracks in the engine. To prevent
damage, add engine coolant
slowly in small quantities.
What to do in an emergency
86
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment. Pull up the luggage
box cover to reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
(Continued)
OTF060002
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jacking
support.
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
69
What to do in an emergency
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Place the shift lever into P (Park).
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
OTF060005L
OBH068002L 1JBA6504
C
C
l
l
o
o
s
s
e
e
O
O
p
p
e
e
n
n
What to do in an emergency
106
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
WARNING -
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in the vehicle that is
being jacked.
OHG060004
OYF069019N
611
What to do in an emergency
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
OHG060006
CAUTION
Do not place the jack on the
plastic guard. The plastic guard
may be damaged.
What to do in an emergency
126
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
11. Lower the car to the ground by
turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are all tight. Then double-check
each nut for tightness. After changing
wheels, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer tighten the wheel
nuts to their proper torque as soon
as possible.
OHG060007L
WARNING
• Wheels may have sharp
edges. Handle them carefully
to avoid possible severe
injury.
• Before putting the wheel into
place, be sure that there is
nothing on the hub or wheel
(such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.)
that interferes with the wheel
from fitting solidly against the
hub. If there is, remove it. If
the contact of the mounting
surface between the wheel
and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
This may cause serious injury
or death.
613
What to do in an emergency
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” sec-
tion 8.
What to do in an emergency
146
Jack label 1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
OHYK064001
OHYK064002
• Type A
■ Example
• Type B
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
615
What to do in an emergency
JACKDOC14S
EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack
What to do in an emergency
166
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the TPMS malfunction
indicator remains illuminated after
blinking for approximately 1 minute,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intend-
ed.
OHG060001
OHG040083L
■ Type A ■ Type B
617
What to do in an emergency
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
✽
NOTICE
Take your vehicle to the nearest
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked if any of
the below happens:
1.The low tire pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator does
not illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position or engine is running.
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 1 minute.
3.The Low tire pressure position
telltale remains illuminated.
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
Low tire pressure posi-
tion telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. The low
tire pressure position telltale light will
indicate which tire is significantly
under-inflated by illuminating the cor-
responding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot
reach a service station or if the tire
cannot hold the newly added air,
replace the low pressure tire with a
spare tire.
After restarting with the spare tire,
the TPMS malfunction indicator and
low tire pressure position telltale light
will remain on about 20 minutes of
continuous driving, then the TPMS
malfunction indicator will blink for
approximately 1 minute but the low
pressure position telltale light will
turn off.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may
illuminate if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
What to do in an emergency
186
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an underinfla-
tion warning at the same time as sys-
tem failure then the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator remains illuminated
after blinking for approximately 1
minute and the low tire pressure posi-
tion telltale will illuminate e.g. if Front
Left sensor fails, the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator remains illuminated
after blinking for approximately 1
minute, but if the Front Right, Rear
Left, or Rear Right tire is under-inflat-
ed, the low tire pressure position tell-
tales may illuminate together with the
TPMS malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible to determine the cause
of the problem.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if
snow chains are used or some
separate electronic devices
such as notebook computer,
mobile charger, remote starter
or navigation etc., are used in
the vehicle. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
619
What to do in an emergency
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. Have the flat tire repaired
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible or replace the
flat tire with the spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the TPMS
malfunction indicator may blink for
approximately 1 minute and then
remain continuously illuminated
because the TPMS sensor is not
mounted on the spare wheel.
Once the low pressure tire is reinflat-
ed to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle is initiat-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er, the TPMS malfunction indicator
and the low tire pressure and posi-
tion telltales will turn off within a few
minutes of driving.
If the indicators do not go off after a
few minutes of driving, please visit
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
You may not be able identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
CAUTION
NEVER use a puncture-repair-
ing agent to repair and/or inflate
a low pressure tire. The tire
sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensor. If used, you
will have to replace the tire pres-
sure sensor.
CAUTION
Do not use any tire sealant if your
vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System. The
liquid sealant can damage the
tire pressure sensors.
What to do in an emergency
206
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING - For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle, it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
• The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recom-
mend that you use parts for
replacement from an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If you use the wheels on the
market, use a TPMS sensor
approved by a HYUNDAI deal-
er. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a TPMS sensor
or TPMS does not work prop-
erly, you may fail the periodic
vehicle inspection conducted
in your country.
❈
All vehicles sold in the
EUROPE market during below
period must be equipped with
TPMS.
- New model vehicle : Nov. 1,
2012 ~
- Current model vehicle : Nov.
1, 2014~ (Based on vehicle
registrations)
621
What to do in an emergency
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial
tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-
ing procedures are necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel
dollies or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dol-
lies) and the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the rear.
✽
NOTICE
If the EPB does not release normally,
take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer by loading the vehicle
on a flatbed tow truck and have the sys-
tem checked.
HXD02
HXD03
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle with the
front wheels on the ground as
this may cause damage to the
vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
OMC045012
A
B
C
dolly
TOWING
What to do in an emergency
226
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
(front, if equipped)
1. Open the trunk, and remove the tow-
ing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the front
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow
truck service.
OHG060008
OHG060009
■ Rear
CAUTION
Failure to place the shift lever in N
(Neutral) may cause internal dam-
age to the transaxle.
■ Front
OHG060010
623
What to do in an emergency
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporar-
ily towed using a cable or chain secured to
the emergency towing hook under the
front/rear of the vehicle. Use extreme cau-
tion when towing the vehicle. A driver must
be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the
brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels,
axles, power train, steering and brakes
must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-
cle out of mud, sand or other conditions
from which the vehicle cannot be driven
out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should com-
municate with each other frequently.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable
to be moved, do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for
assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
What to do in an emergency
246
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16
feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Place the ignition switch in ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
Tie-down hook
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neu-
tral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehi-
cle to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1
mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle fluid leak under
your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle fluid is leaking, a
flatbed equipment or towing dolly
must be used.
OTD069011
WARNING
Do not use the hooks under the
vehicle for towing purposes. These
hooks are designed ONLY for trans-
port tie-down. If the tie-down hooks
are used for towing, the tie-down
hooks or deflector will be damaged
and this could lead to serious
injury.
CAUTION
When using the tie-down hook for
transport tie-down, install chains
faced rearward.
625
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
There are some emergency commodities
in the vehicle to help you respond to the
emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know how to
use the fire extinguisher, take the follow-
ing steps carefully.
1. Pull the pin at the top of the extin-
guisher that keeps the handle from
being accidentally pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle toward the base of the
fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft) away
from the fire and squeeze the handle
to discharge the extinguisher. If you
release the handle, the discharge will
stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at the
base of the fire. After the fire appears
to be out, watch it carefully since it
may re-ignite.
First aid kit
There are some items such as scissors,
bandage and adhesive tape and etc. in
the kit to give first aid to an injured per-
son.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the road to
warn oncoming vehicles during emer-
gencies, such as when the vehicle is
parked by the roadside due to any prob-
lems.
Tire pressure gauge
(If equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-to-
day use, and you may have to add a few
pounds of air periodically and it is not
usually a sign of a leaking tire, but of nor-
mal wear. Always check tire pressure
when the tires are cold because tire pres-
sure increases with temperature.
To check the tire pressure, take the fol-
lowing steps;
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is
located on the rim of the tire.
2. Press and hold the gauge against the
tire valve. Some air will escape as you
begin and more will escape if you don't
press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will activate
the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge to
know whether the tire pressure is low
or high.
5. Adjust the tire pressures to the speci-
fied pressure. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 8.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
7
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-3
Owner maintenance / 7-4
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-6
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-24
Engine oil / 7-27
Engine coolant / 7-28
Brake fluid / 7-31
Power steering fluid / 7-32
Washer fluid / 7-33
Parking brake / 7-33
Air cleaner / 7-34
Climate control air filter / 7-36
Wiper blades / 7-38
Battery / 7-40
Tires and wheels / 7-43
Fuses / 7-53
Light bulbs / 7-65
Appearance care / 7-74
Emission control system / 7-80
Maintenance
Maintenance
27
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine oil dipstick
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Radiator cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Air cleaner
9.
Positive battery terminal
10. Negative battery terminal
11. Fuse box
OHG010003L/OHG010004L
■
2.4L
■
3.0L
73
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehi-
cle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
perform this work.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has fac-
tory-trained technicians and genuine
HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality
service, see an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages. You need
this information to establish your compli-
ance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI’s high
service quality standards and receives
technical support from HYUNDAI in
order to provide you with a high level of
service satisfaction.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, sev-
eral procedures can be done only by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special
tools.
✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during the
warranty period may affect warranty
coverage. For details, read the separate
Service Passport provided with the vehi-
cle. If you're unsure about any servicing
or maintenance procedure, have it done
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
47
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer at the frequencies indicated to
help ensure safe, dependable operation
of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while work-
ing under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose cloth-
ing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
CAUTION
• Do not put heavy objects or apply
excessive force on top of the
engine cover (if equipped) or fuel
related parts.
• When you inspect the fuel system
(fuel lines and fuel injection
devices), we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Do not drive long time with the
engine cover (if equipped)
removed.
• When checking the engine room,
do not go near fire.
Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are flam-
mable oils that may cause fire.
• Before touching the battery, igni-
tion cables and electrical wiring,
you should disconnect the bat-
tery "-" terminal. You may get an
electric shock from the electric
current.
• When you remove the interior
trim cover with a flat head (-) driv-
er, be careful not to damage the
cover.
• Be careful when you replace and
clean bulbs to avoid burns or
electrical shock.
75
Maintenance
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reser-
voir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
• Check the radiator and condenser.
Check if the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked
with leaves, dirt or insects etc.
If any of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condi-
tion, take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
eling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)
function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air condition-
ing system during or after use is nor-
mal).
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with wash-
er fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
Maintenance
67
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if
the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, fol-
low Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 32°C
(90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After the periods or distance shown in
the chart, continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
77
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-
mined by whichever occurs first.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
*
1
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350
miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
2
: Driving in summer season temperature over 40 °C (104 °F
- SAUDI, UAE, OMAN, KUWAIT, BAHRAIN, QATAR, IRAN,
YEMEN ETC) or driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h) must
conform the severe driving condition.
*
3
: Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive
belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).
Inspect and if necessary repair or replace.
*
4
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some impor-
tant matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power,
hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediate-
ly regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
5
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval
when you do maintenance of other items.
*
6
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration
and adjust if necessary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer
should perform the operation.
*
7
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft
water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can
result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
8
: If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards
(EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not avail-
able, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are
available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
Maintenance
87
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
- Except Middle East *
1
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Middle East *
1
*
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
8
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *
3
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
4
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
- Except Middle East *
1
(Continued)
79
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Middle East *
1
*
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
8
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
45,000 km (30,000 miles) or 36months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Middle East *
1
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Middle East *
1
*
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace spark plug (2.4L) - Except Middle East
❑ Replace spark plug (2.4L) - For Middle East
(Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles))
❑ Add fuel additives *
8
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
Maintenance
107
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *
3
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Middle East *
1
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Middle East *
1
*
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace fuel filter *
4
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter
❑ Add fuel additives *
8
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
711
Maintenance
75,000 km (50,000 miles) or 60months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Middle East *
1
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Middle East *
1
*
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
8
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *
3
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
4
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
5
*
6
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
(Continued)
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
- Except Middle East *
1
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Middle East *
1
*
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace spark plug (2.4L) - Except Middle East
❑ Replace spark plug (2.4L) - For Middle East
(Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles))
❑ Add fuel additives *
8
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
105,000 km (70,000 miles) or 84months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Middle East *
1
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Middle East *
1
*
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
8
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 96months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *
3
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Middle East *
1
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Middle East *
1
*
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace fuel filter *
4
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter
❑ Replace coolant *
5
*
7
(At first, 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Replace spark plug (3.0L) - Except Middle East
(Every 165,000 km (100,000 miles))
❑ Replace spark plug (3.0L) - For Middle East
(Every 160,000 km (100,000 miles))
❑ Add fuel additives *
8
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
Maintenance
147
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS (EXCEPT EUROPE)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and engine
oil filter
For Middle East R
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, K, L
Except Middle East R
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or
6 months
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
A, B, H, I, L
Automatic transaxle fluid R Every 100,000 km (62,000 miles) A, C, F, G, I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
715
Maintenance
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5
miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles)
in freezing temperature
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads
H : Towing a trailer (if equipped)
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 140 km/h (87 mile/h)
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance
167
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-
mined by whichever occurs first.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
*
1
: If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards
(EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not avail-
able, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are
available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350
miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: Driving in summer season temperature over 40 °C (104 °F
- SAUDI, UAE, OMAN, KUWAIT, BAHRAIN, QATAR, IRAN,
YEMEN ETC) or driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h) must
conform the severe driving condition.
*
4
: Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive
belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).
Inspect and if necessary repair or replace.
*
5
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some impor-
tant matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power,
hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediate-
ly regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
6
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval
when you do maintenance of other items.
*
7
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration
and adjust if necessary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer
should perform the operation.
*
8
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft
water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can
result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
717
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE (CONT.)
15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
2
30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace brake fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
2
Maintenance
187
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE (CONT.)
45,000 km (30,000 miles) or 36months
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
2
❑ Replace spark plugs (2.4L)
60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
5
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap (Gasoline)
❑ Replace brake fluid
(Continued)
719
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
2
75,000 km (50,000 miles) or 60months
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
2
Maintenance
207
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE (CONT.)
90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *
4
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
6
*
7
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace brake fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
2
105,000 km (70,000 miles) or 84months
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
2
721
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE (CONT.)
120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 96months
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *
4
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
5
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace brake fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
2
❑ Replace coolant *
6
*
8
(At first, 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120months
after that, every 30,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Replace spark plug (3.0L)
(Every 165,000 km (100,000 miles))
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
Maintenance
227
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS (FOR EUROPE)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and engine oil filter R Every 7,500 km (4,500 miles) or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, K, L
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
A, B, H, I, L
Automatic transaxle fluid R Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles) A, C, F, G, I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
723
Maintenance
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5
miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles)
in freezing temperature
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads
H : Towing a trailer (if equipped)
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 140 km/h (87 mile/h)
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Maintenance
247
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more fre-
quent oil and filter changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-
ration and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as neces-
sary.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an exces-
sive amount of foreign matter accumu-
lates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. Have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
any damaged or leaking parts immedi-
ately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-
cate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat dam-
age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and cou-
plings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
CAUTION
When you are inspecting the belt,
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF or ACC position.
725
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should
perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check cooling system components, such
as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid should
be changed at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer in accordance to the scheduled
maintenance at the beginning of this
chapter.
✽
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is basi-
cally red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunc-
tion and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
WARNING
Do not disconnect and inspect
spark plugs when the engine is hot.
You may burn yourself.
Maintenance
267
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system includ-
ing the parking brake pedal or lever and
cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
For more information on checking the
pads or lining wear limit, refer to the
Hyundai web site.
(http://brakeman
ual.hmc.co.kr)
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage. Replace
any damaged or leaking parts immedi-
ately. Inspect the power steering belt (or
drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks,
excessive wear, oiliness and proper ten-
sion. Replace or adjust it if necessary.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-
essary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
(if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage.
727
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F (Full) and L (Low).
If it is near or at L (Low), add enough oil
to bring the level to F (Full). Do not over-
fill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capaci-
ties” in section 8.)
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
OVG079003L
CAUTION
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immedi-
ately.
• When you wipe the oil level
gauge, you should wipe it with a
clean cloth. When mixed with
debris, it can cause engine dam-
age.
OVG079004L
Maintenance
287
Changing the engine oil and filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the begin-
ning of this section.
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-
tory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irrita-
tion or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory ani-
mals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
ENGINE COOLANT
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap while the engine is oper-
ating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in seri-
ous personal injury from escap-
ing hot coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
(Continued)
CAUTION
• When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly
adding engine coolant may cause
cracks in the engine. To prevent
damage, add engine coolant
slowly in small quantities.
• Do not drive with no engine
coolant. It may cause water pump
failure and engine seizure, etc.
729
Maintenance
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (Full) and L (Low) marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F (Full), but do not overfill. If fre-
quent additions are required, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling
system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deion-
ized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improp-
er coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be pro-
tected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-
ing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
The electric motor (cool-
ing fan) is controlled by
engine coolant tempera-
ture, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed.
It may sometimes operate even
when the engine is not running.
Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blades. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the
electric motor will automatically
shut off. This is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling fan)
may operate until you disconnect
the negative battery cable.
OYF079005
Maintenance
307
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure causing serious injury.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such
as the generator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
OHG072006L
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze
Water
731
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX (Maximum) and MIN
(Minimum) marks on the side of the
reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake fluid, clean the area around
the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent
brake fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
(Maximum) level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a normal
condition associated with the wear of the
brake linings. If the fluid level is exces-
sively low, have the brake system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants or capaci-
ties” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
✽
NOTICE
Before removing the brake filler cap,
read the warning on the cap.
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
WARNING - Loss of brake
fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to contact
the vehicle's body paint, as paint
damage will result. Brake fluid,
which has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should never
be used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be disposed
of properly. Don't put in the wrong
kind of fluid. A few drops of miner-
al-based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
OVG079007L
WARNING
Clean filler cap before removing.
Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake fluid
from a sealed container.
Maintenance
327
POWER STEERING FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Checking the power steering fluid
level
With the vehicle on level ground, check
the fluid level in the power steering reser-
voir periodically. The fluid should be
between MAX (Maximum) and MIN
(Minimum) marks on the side of the
gauge at the normal temperature.
Before adding power steering fluid, thor-
oughly clean the area around the reser-
voir cap to prevent power steering fluid
contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
(Maximum) level.
✽
NOTICE
Check that the fluid level is in the
"HOT" range on the gauge. If the fluid
is cold, check that it is in the "COLD"
range.
In the event the power steering system
requires frequent addition of fluid, the
vehicle should be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only the specified power steering
fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants
or capacities" in section 8.)
Checking the power steering
hose
Check the connections for oil leaks, dam-
age and twists in the power steering
hose before driving.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, do not operate the
vehicle for prolonged periods
with a low power steering fluid
level.
• Never start the engine when the
reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful that
dirt does not get into the tank.
• Too little fluid can result in
increased steering effort and/or
noise from the power steering
system.
• The use of the non-specified fluid
could reduce the effectiveness of
the power steering system and
cause damage to it.
OVG079008L
733
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you
can check the level with a quick visual
inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Checking the parking brake
Check whether the stroke is within spec-
ification when the parking brake pedal is
depressed with 30 kg (66 lb, 294N) of
force. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-
ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 5 notch
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contacting
windshield washer fluid. Serious
injury or death could occur.
OHG070008 OHG051085
PARKING BRAKE
Maintenance
347
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage condi-
tions” in this section.)
OHG070009 OHG070010 OVG079012
735
Maintenance
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner fil-
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use
of non-genuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
Maintenance
367
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the severely
air-polluted cities or on dusty rough
roads for a long period, it should be
inspected more frequently and replaced
earlier. When you, the owner, replace the
climate control air filter, replace it per-
forming the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Replace the filter according to the main-
tenance Schedule.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove the
support strap (1).
2. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers by turning them counter-
clockwise on both sides.
OHG070012OHG070011
737
Maintenance
3. Remove the climate control air filter
cover while pressing the lock on the
right side of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽
NOTICE
When replacing the climate control air
filter install it properly. Otherwise, the
system may produce noise and the effec-
tiveness of the filter may be reduced.
OHG070041OHG070014
Maintenance
387
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
shield wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
1JBA5122
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
739
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull
down the blade assembly and remove
it.
3. Install the new blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
OHM078059
OHM078060
OHG070043
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
Maintenance
407
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the bat-
tery cables.
✽
NOTICE
Basically equipped battery is mainte-
nance free type. If your vehicle is
equipped with the battery marked with
LOWER and UPPER on the side, you can
check the electrolyte level. The electrolyte
level should be between LOWER and
UPPER. If the electrolyte level is low, it
needs to add distilled (demineralized)
water (Never add sulfuric acid or other
electrolyte). When refill, be careful not to
splash the battery and adjacent compo-
nents. And do not overfill the battery
cells. It can cause corrosion on other
parts. After then ensure that tighten the
cell caps. We recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OHG073015
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always pres-
ent in battery cells and may
explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensa-
tion, get medical attention
immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
(Continued)
741
Maintenance
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
Battery capacity label
1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI model
name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity
(in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in amperes
by EN
CAUTION
• When you don’t use the vehicle
for a long time in the low temper-
ature area, separate the battery
and keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully to
prevent the battery case dam-
aged in low temperature area.
• If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorized devices.
WARNING
Separating the battery from the
vehicle should be done in an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OJD072039
■ Example
(Continued)
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
The battery contains lead. Do
not dispose of it after use.
Please return the battery to
an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to be recycled.
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warn-
ings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
Maintenance
427
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-
30A for two hours.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Driver position memory system
(See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
WARNING
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
• Operation related to the battery
should be done in an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
• Keep the battery away from water
or any liquid.
• For your safety, use the authentic-
ity by approved authorized
HYUNDAI dealer, when you
replace the battery.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
743
Maintenance
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire underin-
flation
Severe underinflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OHG050081L
Maintenance
447
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (one
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
745
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling, loss of vehi-
cle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pres-
sure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehi-
cle.
Maintenance
467
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
S2BLA790
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)
Directional tires (if equipped)
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
747
Maintenance
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
WARNING - Replacing
tires
• Driving on worn-out tires is very
hazardous and will reduce brak-
ing effectiveness, steering
accuracy, and traction.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capabili-
ty. Do not use a size and type of
tire and wheel that is different
from the one that is originally
installed on your vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION
When replacing the tires,
recheck and tighten the wheel
nuts after driving about 1,000
km (620 miles). If the steering
wheel shakes or the vehicle
vibrates while driving, the tire is
out of balance. Align the tire bal-
ance. If the problem is not
solved, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
(Continued)
It can affect the safety and per-
formance of your vehicle, which
could lead to handling failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be
sure to equip all four tires with
the tire and wheel of the same
size, type, tread, brand and load-
carrying capacity.
• The use of any other tire size or
type may seriously affect ride,
handling, ground clearance,
stopping distance, body to tire
clearance, snow tire clearance,
and speedometer reliability.
• It is best to replace all four tires
at the same time. If that is not
possible, or necessary, then
replace the two front or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling.
(Continued)
Maintenance
487
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
(Continued)
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4 tires
must use the same size original-
ly supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size
can cause the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) and ESP
(Electronic Stability Program) (if
equipped) to work irregularly.
749
Maintenance
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
225/55R17 97V
225 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
97 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
V - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX17
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
Maintenance
507
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2014.
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an acci-
dent involving serious injury or
death.
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
751
Maintenance
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Maintenance
527
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high tempera-
ture can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
(Continued)
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slight-
est hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire infor-
mation on the tire sidewall.
(Continued)
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
753
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one locat-
ed in the driver’s side panel bolster,
another is in the engine compartment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, discon-
nect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and multi fuse for higher amperage rat-
ings.
✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse -
even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
OLM079051N
Normal
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
■ Fusible link
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
Normal Blown
Maintenance
547
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
OHG070016
OYF079021
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips The incomplete fas-
tening fuse or relay may cause
the vehicle wiring and electric
systems damage and a possible
fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and termi-
nals may be fastened incomplete-
ly, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, we recommend that you
consult with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause con-
tact failure and system malfunc-
tion.
755
Maintenance
If the headlights or other electrical com-
ponents do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse panel in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF posi-
tion, some items such as audio and digi-
tal clock must be reset and transmitter
(or smart key) may not work properly.
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine com-
partment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OHG070018
OHG070019
CAUTION
Always place the fuse switch in the
ON position while driving the vehi-
cle.
Maintenance
567
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel in the engine
compartment.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽
NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water contact.
OHG070021OVG079023L
757
Maintenance
✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehi-
cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Engine compartment fuse panel
OHG070022/OHG070023/OHG070024
Instrument panel fuse panel
Maintenance
587
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
No. Fuse rating Symbol Protected component
F1 7.5A Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module
F2 7.5A
IND
Instrument Cluster
F3 20A
SPARE 1
-
F4 10A
AUDI
O
AMP, MAP Lamp, Front Monitor, E/R Fuse & Relay Box(RLY.13), A/V & Navigation Head Unit,
Smart Key Control Module, Audio
F5 7.5A
MODULE
2
ABS/ESP Control Module, Steering Angle Sensor, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH,
A/C Control Module, Active Incar Sensor, Driver IMS Module, Front/Rear Parking Assist,
Sensor LH/RH/LH (Center)/RH (Center)
F6 10A
MODULE
1
Console Switch LH, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Driver/Passenger Door Module, Stop
Lamp Switch, Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module, Smart Cruise Control Radar, E/R Fuse & Relay
Box(RLY. 6), Instrument Cluster, Crash Pad Switch, Multifunction Switch, Head Lamp Leveling Device
Actuator LH/RH, Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Electronic Parking Brake Module, Electro
Chromic Mirror, ATM Lever Indicator, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Steering Tilt&Telescopic Module
F7 10A Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module
F9 20A Center Tray Outlet, Rear Power Outlet #2
F10 15A SRS Control Module, A/C Control Module
F11 7.5A
Panorama Sunroof, Instrument Cluster, Rain Sensor, Smart Key Control Module, ICM Relay Box (Head
Lamp Washer Relay), Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
759
Maintenance
No. Fuse rating Symbol Protected component
F12 7.5A
A/C Control Module, E/R Fuse & Relay (RLY.14), Cluster Ionizer, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer
Module, Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module
F13 10A Steering Wheel Heater
F14 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (F11, F12, F13)
F15 20A -
F16 10A
Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Door Module, Instrument Cluster, Tire
Pressure Monitoring Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor
F17 10A
Cup Holder Lamp, Rear Door Lamp LH/RH, MAP Lamp, Driver/Passenger Door Mood Lamp,
Driver/Passenger Door Lamp, Driver/Passenger Foot Lamp, Driver/Passenger Door Scuff Lamp,
Rear Door Mood Lamp LH/RH, Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Rear Door Scuff Lamp LH/RH,
Trunk Room Lamp, Center Tray Lamp, Garnish Lamp LH/RH, Rear Personal Lamp Center/LH/RH
F18 25A Wiper Motor, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 8, RLY. 11, RLY. 12)
F19 10A Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch, Start Stop Button Switch
F20 15A ICM Relay Box (Rear Fog Lamp Relay)
F21 7.5A RF Receiver
F22 10A Front Monitor, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
F23 7.5A Transaxle Range Switch, PCM, ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay)
Maintenance
607
No. Fuse rating Symbol Protected component
F24 20A Power Seat Relay Box RH, Passenger Reclining Limit Switch
F25 20A Panorama Sunroof
F26 10A Trunk Lid Relay, Fuel Filler Door & Trunk Lid Switch
F27 20A Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
F28 10A Driver Massage Module
F29 25A Driver Safety Window Module, Rear Power Window Switch LH
F30 25A AMP
F31 25A -
F32 25A Passenger Safety Window Module, Rear Power Window Switch RH
F33 25A -
F34 25A Smart Key Control Module
F35 15A Key Solenoid, Sport Mode Switch, Steering Tilt & Telescopic Module
F36 20A Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module
F37 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay
761
Maintenance
No. Fuse rating Symbol Protected component
MULTI
FUSE
F1 60A Smart Junction Box (Fuse - F20/F25/F28/F35, IPS 1, IPS 2, ARISU-LT 1)
F2 60A Smart Junction Box (Fuse - F26/F29/F32/F36)
F3 40A
W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch
With Smart Key - RLY. 2 (PDM 1 (ACC) Relay), LY. 9 (PDM 2 (IG1) Relay)
F4 40A ESP Control Module, ABS Control Module
F5 40A RLY. 1 (RR HTD Relay)
F6 40A RLY. 14 (Blower Relay)
F7 60A Smart Junction Box (Fuse - F19/F24/F27/F30, IPS 3, IPS 4, ARISU-LT 2)
F8 80A -
FUSE
F9 10A A/C Control Module
F10 10A Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror , A/V & Navigation Head Unit
F11 15A Transaxle Range Switch
F12 10A PCM
F13 10A Multipurpose Check Connector
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Maintenance
627
No. Fuse rating Symbol Protected component
FUSE
F14 25A -
F15 30A Electronic Parking Brake Module
F16 40A
RLY. 5 (S tart Relay), W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch,
With Smart Key - RLY. 10 (PDM 3 (IG2) Relay)
F17 30A Electronic Parking Brake Module
F18 40A EMS Box (Fuse - F36 / F37 / F38 / F39)
F19 40A ESP Control Module, ABS Control Module
F20 50A RLY. 3 (C/F an (HI) Relay), RLY. 4 (C/F an (LO) Relay)
F22 20A Multipurpose Check Connector
F23 25A RLY. 13 (P/Outlet Relay)
F24 10A Battery Sensor
F25 10A Smart Cruise Control Radar
F26 15A RLY. 6 (Stop LP Relay), Stop Signal Relay
F27 20A RLY. 7 (Deicer Relay)
763
Maintenance
No. Fuse rating Symbol Protected component
FUSE
F28 20A ICM Relay Box (Head Lamp Washer Relay)
F29 30A
Driver Lumbar Support Limit Switch(W/O Massage), Driver IMS Module,
Power Seat Relay Box LH, Driver Reclining Limit Switch
F30 40A
Smart Junction Box (Fuse - F37/F34, Leak Current Autocut Device (Leak Current Autocut Relay,
Leak Current Autocut Switch, IPS 5)), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse - F22)
No. Fuse rating Symbol Protected component
F31 20A Ignition Coil #1~#4, Condenser
F32 10A
Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2, Oil Control Valve #1/#2,
E/R Fuse & Relay Box ( LY. 3 : C/FAN (HI) Relay)
F33 10A -
F34 10A EMS Box (RLY. 1 : Fuel Pump Relay), Injector #1~#4
F35 15A
Crankshaft Position Sensor, Oxygen Sensor(UP/DOWN), Purge Control Solenoid Valve,
PCM, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve
F36 15A PCM
F37 20A EMS Box (RLY. 1 : Fuel Pump Relay)
F38 15A EMS Box (RLY. 2 : Horn Relay), ICM Relay Box(Burglar Horn Relay)
F39 30A EMS Box (RLY. 3 : Engine Control Relay)
Engine compartment main fuse panel (2.4L)
Maintenance
647
No. Fuse rating Symbol Protected component
F31 20A Ignition Coil #1~#6, Condenser #1/#2
F32 10A Camshaft Position Sensor #1~#4, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 3 : C/FAN (HI) Relay)
F33 10A -
F34 10A EMS Box (RLY. 1 : Fuel Pump Relay), Injector #1 ~ #6
F35 15A
Oxygen Sensor #1~#4, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve,
Oil Control Valve #1~#4, PCM
F36 15A PCM
F37 20A EMS Box (RLY. 1 : Fuel Pump Relay)
F38 15A EMS Box (RLY. 2 : Horn Relay), ICM Relay Box(Burglar Horn Relay)
F39 30A EMS Box (RLY. 3 : Engine Control Relay)
Engine compartment main fuse panel (3.0L)
765
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽
NOTICE
After driving in heavy rain or washing
the vehicle, headlight and taillight lenses
could appear frosty. This condition is
caused by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and outside.
This is similar to the condensation on
your windows inside your vehicle during
the rain and doesn’t indicate a problem
with your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Headlight, position light, turn sig-
nal light, front fog light bulb
replacement
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Position light
(5) Front fog light
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the LOCK position and turn off the
lights to avoid sudden movement
of the vehicle and burning your fin-
gers or receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. In many cases, it is difficult
to replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the vehicle
must be removed before you can
get to the bulb. This is especially
true if you have to remove the head-
light assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
OHG070025
Maintenance
667
Headlight (HID type)
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
OHD076046
WARNING -
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands.
Residual oil may cause the bulb
to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
(Continued)
WARNING - HID Headlight
low beam (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON bulb)
due to electric shock danger. If the
low beam (XENON bulb) is not
working, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI Dealer
767
Maintenance
✽
NOTICE
HID lamps have superior performance
vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps are esti-
mated by the manufacturer to last twice
as long or longer than halogen bulbs
depending on their frequency of use.
They will probably require replacement
at some point in the life of the vehicle.
Cycling the headlamps on and off more
than typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent lamps.
If a headlamp goes out after a period of
operation but will immediately relight
when the headlamp switch is cycled it is
likely the HID lamp needs to be
replaced. HID lighting components are
more complex than conventional halo-
gen bulbs thus have higher replacement
cost.
Headlight (bulb type)
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket
connector.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
6. Install a new headlight bulb.
7. Connect the headlight bulb socket
connector.
8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-
ing it clockwise.
✽
NOTICE
We recommend that the headlight aim-
ing be adjusted after an accident or
after the headlight assembly is rein-
stalled at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OHG070045
OHG070044
■ High beam
■ Low beam
Maintenance
687
Traffic Change (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is asym-
metric.
If you go abroad to a country with oppo-
site traffic direction, this asymmetric part
will dazzle oncoming car driver. To pre-
vent dazzle, ECE regulation demand
several technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet, down
aiming). This headlamps are designed
not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you do
not need to change your headlamps in a
country with opposite traffic direction.
Turn signal light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
Position and front fog light
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OHG070042
769
Maintenance
Side repeater light bulb replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Backup light
(4) Rear fog light (if equipped)
Stop and tail light
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OHG070026
OHG070027
Maintenance
707
Rear turn signal light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the trunk.
3. Remove the service cover by pulling out
the service cover.
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
Backup light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the trunk.
3. Loosen the retaining screw of the trunk
lid cover and then remove the cover.
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counter clock-
wise until the tabs on the socket align
with the slots on the assembly.
OHG070028
OHG070029
OHG070030
771
Maintenance
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
7. Install the socket into the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by pushing
in the screw.
Rear fog light (if equipped)
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
High mounted stop light
replacement (if equipped)
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OHG070040 OHG070031
Maintenance
727
License plate light bulb replace-
ment
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Loosen the retaining screws with a
philips head screwdriver.
3. Remove the bulb assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb assembly securely
with the retaining screws.
Interior light bulb replacement
Glove box lamp, sunvisor lamp and
luggage lamp
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
■ Glove box lamp
■ Sunvisor lamp
■ Luggage lamp
OHG070039
OHG070033/OHG070032/OHG070034
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-
ton is pressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
773
Maintenance
Map lamp, room lamp and door cour-
tesy lamp
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
■ Map lamp
■ Door courtesy lamp
■ Room lamp
Type A
OHG070035/OHG070036
OHG070037/OHG070038
Type B
Maintenance
747
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
APPEARANCE CARE
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
775
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits or engine
and related part located in the
engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components and
air duct inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
OJB037800
Maintenance
767
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
777
Maintenance
Aluminum or chrome wheel mainte-
nance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum or chrome
wheels. They may scratch or damage
the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid deter-
gent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum or chrome wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro-
sion, we produces cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unpro-
tected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly impor-
tant. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when tempera-
tures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis-
persed. For all these reasons, it is par-
ticularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
Maintenance
787
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from get-
ting started by observing the following:
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the compo-
nents under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accu-
mulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly effec-
tive in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-
able environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of cor-
rosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-
ly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possi-
ble.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
779
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-
metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions for the proper way to
clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-
bing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/
electronic components inside the
vehicle as this may damage them.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
Maintenance
807
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Service Passport
in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
sion control system to meet all applicable
emission regulations.
There are three emission control sys-
tems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is rec-
ommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in this manu-
al.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Program (ESP) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-
ing during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) system off by press-
ing the ESP switch.
• After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESP system back on
by pressing the ESP switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase.This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
781
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-
ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-
es so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms-
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, bat-
tery discharge and fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorized electronic
devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions (car-
bon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever sus-
pect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though color-
less and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions on this
page to avoid CO poisoning.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements"
suggested in section 1.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremly low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as grass, vegeta-
tion, paper, leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot while the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off. Keep
away from the exhaust system
and catalytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for cor-
rosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
782
Maintenance
8
Engine / 8-2
Dimensions / 8-2
Bulb wattage / 8-2
Tires and wheels / 8-3
Load and speed capacity tires / 8-3
Weight and volume / 8-4
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-5
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-7
Vehicle certification label / 8-8
Tire specification and pressure label / 8-8
Engine number / 8-8
Air conditioner compressor label / 8-9
Declaration of conformity / 8-9
Specifications & Consumer information
Specifications & Consumer information
28
BULB WATTAGE
Item mm (in)
Overall length 4910 (193.3)
Overall width 1860 (73.2)
Overall height 1470 (57.8)
Front tread
225/55 R17 1613 (63.5)
245/45 R18 1606 (63.2)
245/40 R19 1602 (63.0)
Rear tread
225/55 R17 1614 (63.5)
245/45 R18 1607 (63.2)
245/40 R19 1603 (63.1)
Wheelbase 2845 (112.0)
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front
Headlights (Low) 55 or 35 (HID) H7 or D1S
Headlights (High) 55 H7
Front turn signal lights 21 HY21W
Position lights LED LED
Side repeater lights LED LED
Front fog lights 35 H8
Rear
Rear fog lights* LED LED
Stop light LED LED
Tail light LED LED
Rear turn signal lights 27 PY27W
Back-up lights 16 W16W
High mounted stop light* LED LED
License plate lights 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamps LED LED
Room lamps LED LED
Luggage lamp 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON
DIMENSIONS
ENGINE
Item
2.4L 3.0L
Displacement cc
(cu. in)
2359
(143.95)
2999
(183.01)
Bore x Stroke mm
(in.)
88x97
(3.46x3.81)
92x75.2
(3.62x2.96)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-2-3-4-5-6
No. of cylinders 4, In-line 6, V-type
* : If equipped
83
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
*
1
: Normal load : Up to 3 persons
Item Tire size Wheel size
Inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)
Wheel lug nut torque
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
Normal load *
1
Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
225/55R17 7.0Jx17
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
245/45R18 7.5Jx18
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
245/40R19 8.0Jx19
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY TIRES
*
1
LI : LOAD INDEX
*
2
SS : SPEED SYMBOL
Item Tire size Wheel size
Load Capacity Speed Capacity
LI *
1
kg SS *
2
km/h
Full size tire
225/55R17 7.0J×17 97 730 V 240
245/45R18 7.5J×18 94 670 V 240
245/40R19 8.0J×19 94 670 V 240
Specifications & Consumer information
48
WEIGHT AND VOLUME
Item 2.4L 3.0L
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)
2050 (4519) 2120 (4673)
Luggage volume
l (cu ft)
SAE 461 (16.2)
VDA 546 (19.2)
85
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
Yellow engine oil dipstick
*
4
Red engine oil dipstick
*
5
If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
2.4L
With oil cooler
4.6 l (4.86 US qt.) *
3
API Service SM *
5
,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
4.8 l (5.07 US qt.) *
4
Without oil cooler
4.5 l (4.76 US qt.) *
3
4.7 l (4.97 US qt.) *
4
3.0L
5.7 l (6.02 US qt.)
Engine oil
consumption
Normal driving condition
MAX. 1 l /1500 km
-
Severe driving condition
MAX. 1 l /1000 km
-
Automatic transaxle
fluid
2.4L
7.1 l (7.50 US qt.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV
3.0L
7.8 l (8.24 US qt.)
Power steering fluid
0.9 l (0.95 US qt.)
PSF-4
Coolant
2.4L
6.8 l (7.18 US qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol
base coolant for aluminum radiator)
3.0L
8.4 l (8.87 US qt.)
Brake fluid
0.7~0.8 l (0.7~0.8 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
70 l (18.49 US gal.)
-
Specifications & Consumer information
68
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for sat-
isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those rec-
ommended could result in engine dam-
age.
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be oper-
ated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
*1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE
5W-20*
2
(API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country,
select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*2. In Middle East, do not use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-20.
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-20*
2
, 5W-30
87
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your car
and in all legal matters pertaining to its
ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the engine
compartment bulkhead or on the floor
under the front passenger’s seat.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
OBH088005N
VIN label
OYF089004
OHG081008L
OVG089001
• 3.0L
■ Type A
• 2.4L
■ Type B
Specifications & Consumer information
88
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side
center pillar gives the vehicle identifica-
tion number (VIN).
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best perform-
ance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures rec-
ommended for your car.
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
OHG050081L
ENGINE NUMBER
OHG080005L
■ 2.4L
OHG080006L
■ 3.0L
OHG080002
OHG080007L
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
■ Type A
■ Type B
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
89
Specifications & Consumer information
A compressor label informs you the type
of compressor your vehicle is equipped
with such as model, supplier part num-
ber, production number, refrigerant (1)
and refrigerant oil (2).
The radio frequency components of the
vehicle comply with requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive
1995/5/EC.
Further information including the manu-
facturer's declaration of conformity is
available on HYUNDAI web site as fol-
lows;
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
OHC081001 CE0678
■ Example
